Oasis montaj 7.0 Mapping and Processing System The core software platform for working with large volume spatial data
QUICK START™ TUTORIALS
www.geosoft.com
The software described in this manual is furnished under license and may only be used or copied in accordance with the terms of the license. Manual release date: 1/16/2008. Written by, Nancy Whitehead. Please send comments or questions to
[email protected] Copyright © Geosoft Inc. 2008. All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system or transmitted, in any form, or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photo-copying, reading, or otherwise, without prior consent from Geosoft Inc. Program Copyright© Geosoft Inc. 2008. All rights reserved. Geosoft and Oasis montaj are registered trademarks of Geosoft Inc. GEOSOFT, Oasis are trademarks of Geosoft Inc. Windows®, and Windows NT™ are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation. Geosoft Incorporated 8th Floor 85 Richmond St. W. Toronto, Ontario M5H 2C9 Canada Tel: (416) 369-0111 Fax: (416) 369-9599 Web Site: www.geosoft.com E-mail:
[email protected]
Contents Geosoft License Agreement
1
Finding More Help Information
3
Contacting Technical Support
Geosoft Concepts
3
4
Oasis montaj Viewer
4
Oasis montaj Mapping and Processing System
4
Why Oasis montaj?
6
Keeping you in touch with your data
7
Projects and the Project Explorer
8
What you need to know about Project files
Metadata
9
10
Viewing and Editing Metadata
10
Metadata Tool
12
Databases and high-volume data processing
14
Spreadsheets are the windows to your database
16
How the Spreadsheet Displays Project Data
17
Profiles and viewing your data graphically
18
Maps are more than printed sheets of information
19
ArcGIS MXD Files in Oasis montaj
21
Dynamically link data and information to knowledge
22
Geosoft Algorithms and Techniques
24
Process Maker technology brings dynamic linking to data processing 25
Oasis montaj
27
Mapping and Processing System
27
Getting Started
28
Software and Hardware Requirements
28
Oasis montaj eLicensing
29
Installing Oasis montaj
30
Install from the Oasis montaj CD ROM
30
Install your eLicense (New User)
30
Install from the Oasis montaj CD and/or upgrade to current version
31
Parking (Uninstalling) your eLicense
31
To Park (or Uninstall) your eLicense
31
Transferring your eLicense
32
View Computer ID on target computer
32
Transfer eLicense
32
Install the Transfered eLicense:
32
Updating your eLicense
33
Lock and Unlock eLicenses
33
Setting High-Resolution Graphics
33
Configuring Oasis montaj Settings
33
Advanced Settings
Tutorial 1: Getting Ready to Work Welcome to the Oasis montaj Environment System Files
Creating a Working Directory Copying Tutorial Files to Your Working Directory
Before you Begin
36
39 39 40
40 40
41
Creating a Project
41
Loading Application and Tool Menus
43
Finding FAST Answers to Questions
44
Advantages of FAST Information Delivery
Printing Complete Manuals on Demand
Tutorial 2: Working with Data
45
46
47
Database Menus
47
Creating an Oasis montaj Database
47
Database Lines/Groups
49
Creating a New Line or Group
51
Oasis montaj Supported Data Formats
52
Importing Data into the Oasis montaj Database
53
Drag-n-Drop XYZ Data
55
Displaying Data in the Spreadsheet
55
Channel Header Cells
57
Current X and Y (and Z) Channels
58
Processing Data in the Spreadsheet
58
Displaying a Profile in the Spreadsheet
60
Database Toolbar
61
Protect and Unprotect Channels in a Spreadsheet
62
Creating Working Channels in the Oasis montaj Database
62
Editing a Channel in the Database
65
Editing Data Using Conditional Expressions
67
Using the Channel Math Expression Tool
67
Interpolating Data
69
Profile - Y Axis Options
71
Profile – X Axis options
72
Profile Options
72
Master Sample
73
Saving Changes to Databases
74
Tutorial 3: Importing and Exporting Databases
75
Before You Begin this Tutorial:
75
Getting Ready to Export to a Microsoft Access
76
Exporting to Microsoft Access Database Format
76
Importing a Database Table
77
Exporting to an Excel Comma Separated Value (CSV) File
78
Importing an Excel Comma Separated Value (CSV) File
79
Drag-n-Drop Geosoft Database Files
83
Tutorial 4: Basic Mapping and Gridding
85
Map Menus
86
Selecting Data for Mapping and Processing
86
Creating a New Map
87
Creating a Map Template using Interactive Tools
88
Working with Interactive Map Template Tool
89
Automated Map Sheets
90
Creating MAPPLOT Map Templates (manual)
90
Creating a Base Map
93
Plotting Survey Lines
98
Plotting Profiles
98
Moving Around the Map
100 103
Map Tools Bar
Configurable Hotkeys
105
Gridding Data
106
Grid and Image Menu
106
Bi-Directional
106
Minimum curvature
107
Kriging
108
Tinning
110
Trend Enforcement Gridding
110
Gridding using the Bi-directional gridding method
110
Voxels (3D Gridding) Create a Voxel Grid
Displaying a Grid Recolour Grids
114 114
115 117
Drag-n-Drop Geosoft Grid Files
117
Plotting Contours
117
Snapshots
119
How to Create a Snapshot
120
How to View a Snapshot
120
Close and Save Project
Tutorial 5: Map Editing and CAD Tools
120
123
Before you Begin
123
Create a Project
123
Displaying an Interpretation Map
124
Understanding the Parts of a Map
124
Base and Data Views
125
3D Views
125
Groups
125
View/Group Manager Tool
125
Rendering Options Other Tool Options
126 127
Create a New Group
128
Selecting and Editing Groups
128
Method 1 Method 2
Hiding, Moving and Masking Map Groups
128 129
130
Hiding a Group.
130
Moving a Group
130
Masking a Group
131
Drawing Lines, Polylines and Polygons
133
Drawing Polylines
133
Changing Line Attributes
136
Creating Polygons from Lines
137
Using the Get Colour and Polygon Colour Tools
142
Get Colour Tool Polygon Fill Tool
142 142
Polygon Edit Tools
142
To Add/Remove Vertices on a Polygon
144
Using the Windows Clipboard with Maps in Oasis montaj
145
How does the Windows Clipboard work?
145
Copying Georeferenced information between Maps
146
Use the Clipboard to create a Montage Map or Poster
146
Using the Clipboard to paste a picture from another application on a Map
147
Using the Clipboard to export a graphics from a Map to another application 148
Close and Save Project
148
Tutorial 6: Imaging and Dynamic Linking Before you begin…
149 149
Creating Colour Shaded Images
149
Interactive Colour Imaging and Shadowing
151
Copying and/or Converting Grid Files
154
Using Dynamic Data Links
154
Tutorial 7: Creating Custom Base Maps
157
Tutorial 8: Batch Processing with Scripts
161
Tutorial 9: Advanced Mapping and Gridding
167
Creating a Second Database in a Project
167
Processing Data in the Spreadsheet
170
Plotting Symbols, Colour Bars and Legends
171
Gridding Random Data
182
Gridding Geochemical Data
183
Kriging – Quick Overview
184
Importing Data for Kriging
185
Calculating and Displaying a Variogram Model
186
Selecting Variogram Model and Parameters
188
Plotting Krigrid Data
191
Tutorial 10: Advanced Imaging
193
Tutorial 11: Projections
197
What is a map projection? Parts of a map projection
Understand Geosoft projections
197 197
198
Define a projection in Oasis montaj
198
Define X, Y channels
199
Set a projection to a coordinate pair in a database
200 200
B e f o r e yo u b e g i n …
Setting a Projected (x,y) projection to a database
200
Setting a Geographic (long, lat) projection to a database
206
Define the map projection of a grid
210
Defining the map projection of a map view
214
Create a new map from X, Y coordinates
215
New map from Latitude – Longitude coordinates
218
Displaying data with different projections on a map
220
Applying a warp to a grid
220
Warping image files
223
Converting Elevations
223
Projection concepts and FAQs
225
Tutorial 12: Database Maintenance Utilities
227
Checking Database Details
227
Defragmenting the Database
228
Growing, Verifying or Repairing your Database:
228
Adding Database Comments
228
Tutorial 13: Exporting and Printing Maps
230
Exporting Maps to a File
230
Printing Maps
232
Printer and Page Setup
232
Change or Add New Printer Configuration
234
Print Preview
235
Print a Map
235
Printing in Batch
236
Tutorial 14: 3D Views in Oasis montaj
239
Create a 3D View from an Existing Map View or Group
240
Create a 3D View from an Existing Grid File
243
Add a Plane to an Existing 3D View
246
Draw a group directly onto a plane in an existing 3D View
248
To Plot 3D Colour Range Symbols
249
Notes about 3D Views
252
Displaying a Voxel in a 3D View
252
Plotting Voxel Isosurface (Contour)
253
3D Tool and 3D Viewer
255
Display Tab
256
Plane Tab
257
Voxel Tab
258
Surfaces Tab
258
3D Rendering Memory Requirements
258
Tutorial 15: Data Access Protocol (DAP) DAP’s main features include:
260 260
Find Data with Dapple
260
Find DAP Data
263
Authorizing Your Internet Communication Settings
265
Authorize Internet Communication Dialog
266
Internet Trust Relationship Dialog
266
Metadata Browser
266
Tutorial 16: Trend Enforcement Gridding Tool Before you begin
269 270
Creating a project
270
Accessing the Trend Enforcement menus
271
Opening a Database
271
Gridding your data using Bigrid
272
Displaying a Colour Shaded Grid
274
Finding Trends
275
Accessing Trend Lines in Database
276
Plotting Trend Lines
277
Adding Your Own Trend Lines
278
Gridding Trend Enforced Data
279
Comparing the two grids
280
Deselecting/Selecting Trend Lines
281
Appendix 1: Understanding Spheroids and Datums
283
Spheroids
283
Datums
283 What does this mean?
Working with spheroids and datums
Understanding local datums
283
284
284
Method 1
285
Method 2
286
Choosing a local datum transform
286
Local datum CSV files
287
Adding your own local datum transform
287
Oasis montaj projection files and reference tables
289
GI projection files (*.gi)
289
Projection table files
289
Projection name tables
290
Table 1: Projection transformation methods Parameter Notes:
Table 2: Length units
Appendix 2: Geosoft Line and Pattern Styles L i n e S t yl e s Pattern Styles
290 290
293
294 294 294
Glossary
300
Index
302
1
Geosoft License Agreement GEOSOFT agrees to supply the Licensed Program(s) as specified in my purchase order. Geosoft shall grant me a nontransferable, non-exclusive license to use the Licensed Program(s), subject to the Terms and Conditions herein contained. Should there be a separate signed agreement between you and Geosoft, or between your company and Geosoft, pertaining to the licensed use of this software, that agreement shall take precedence over the terms of this agreement. 1.
DEFINITIONS:
In this Agreement: "Licensed Program(s)" means the actual copy of all or any portion of Geosoft’s proprietary software technology, computer software code, components, dynamic link libraries (DLLs) licensed through the Geosoft license server, including any modifications, improvements or updates provided by GEOSOFT. “Effective Date” is the date the Geosoft license is installed. This date is recorded by the Geosoft License server when the Licensed Program(s) is installed. "Services" means the Services described on Section 4. "Termination" means the occurrences contemplated by Section 6 and 7. 2.
LICENSE:
GEOSOFT grants to me a non-transferable and non-exclusive license to use the Licensed Program(s) for my own purposes whereby the Licensed Program(s) are being used only by myself, on one computer, at any one time. Title and all intellectual property rights in and to the License Program(s), including, without limitation, copyright, trade secrets and trade marks, shall remain with GEOSOFT. I agree to refrain from raising any objection or challenge to such intellectual property rights, or from assisting or causing or permitting other(s) to do so, during the term of the Agreement and thereafter I may not assign this Agreement or any part thereof or sub-license the rights granted herein, or lend, rent, time-share, sell or lease the software without the prior written consent of GEOSOFT. I may not attempt to reverse engineer, de-compile or disassemble the software. I may not make any attempt to circumvent the License Manager that controls the access to the software use. 3.
TERM:
The Term of this Agreement shall commence on the Effective Date and shall continue until termination, as described in Section 6. 4.
SERVICES:
(i) According to the terms of my initial purchase, GEOSOFT shall make available to me, without additional fees such corrections and improvements to the Licensed Program(s) as may be generally incorporated into the Licensed Program(s) by GEOSOFT. (Normally this will be for a period of twelve (12) months). (ii) GEOSOFT has a strong commitment to customer service and product support. GEOSOFT offers me, subject to applicable Service Charge(s), continuing support in the form of email or telephone advice and other assistance in problem diagnosis and the correction of errors or faults in the Licensed Program(s) during the life of this License. When a problem occurs which appears to be related to errors or faults in the Licensed Program(s), I may contact GEOSOFT and GEOSOFT will make an honest effort to solve the problem. However, GEOSOFT cannot guarantee service results or represent or warrant that all errors or program defects will be corrected. Also it is to be noted that each Licensed Program is designed to operate on a Windows NT (sp 6 or later), Windows 2000 or Windows XP platform. (iii) Further, if I request service relating to the modification of the Licensed Program(s) to meet a particular need or to conform with a particular operating environment, GEOSOFT may, at its discretion, modify the Licensed Program(s) to meet these particular needs, subject to applicable Services Charge(s). However, all intellectual property or other rights which may arise from such modifications shall reside with GEOSOFT. 5.
PROTECTION AND SECURITY OF LICENSED PROGRAM
I agree that all additions, modifications, revisions, updates and extensions to the Licensed Program(s) shall be subject to all of the terms and conditions in this agreement. I acknowledge that all copies of the Licensed Program(s), provided by GEOSOFT or made by me pursuant to this Agreement, including, without limitation, translations, compilations, partial copies, modifications, derivative materials and/or updated materials, are proprietary, and the property of GEOSOFT, and may not be distributed to any other persons, without GEOSOFT’s prior written consent. I will not provide or otherwise make the Licensed Program(s) available to anyone in any form without GEOSOFT's prior written consent. 6.
TERMINATION:
This agreement shall terminate upon the termination date, if any, specified in your purchase agreement with Geosoft.
2 This agreement may be terminated only upon thirty-days prior written notice to GEOSOFT. GEOSOFT may terminate this Agreement upon prior written notice effective immediately if I fail to comply with any of the terms and conditions of this Agreement. This Agreement shall terminate automatically upon the institution, or consenting to the institution of proceedings in insolvency or bankruptcy, or upon a trustee in bankruptcy or receiver being appointed for me/us for all or a substantial portion of my/our assets. 7.
EVENTS UPON TERMINATION:
I shall forthwith discontinue use of the Licensed Program(s), on the day Termination shall occur and agree not to resume such use in the future without written authorization from GEOSOFT. I shall uninstall and remove all software from my computer. Within thirty days after Termination, I shall destroy all physical and digital copies of the Licensed Program(s). This obligation relates, without limitation, to all copies in any form, including translations, compilations, derivatives and updated materials, whether partial or complete, and whether or not modified or merged into other materials as authorized herein. 8.
WARRANTY:
GEOSOFT does not warrant that the functions contained in the Licensed Program will meet my requirements or will operate in the combinations which may be selected for use by me, or that the operation of the Licensed Program will be uninterrupted or error free or that all program defects will be corrected. Each Licensed Program shall be furnished to me in accordance with the terms of this Agreement. No warranties, either express or implied, are made to me regarding the Licensed Program. THE FOREGOING WARRANTIES ARE IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER WARRANTIES, EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OR MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. 9.
LIMITATION OF REMEDIES
I agree to accept responsibility for the use of the programs to achieve my intended results, and for the results obtained from use of said Program(s). I therefore accept complete responsibility for any decision made based on my use of the aforementioned Licensed Program(s). In no event shall GEOSOFT be liable for any damages arising from performance or non-performance of the Licensed Program(s), or for any lost profits, lost savings or other consequential damages, even if GEOSOFT has been advised of the possibility of such damages, or for any claim against me by any other party. 10. GENERAL: I agree that this Agreement is a complete and exclusive statement of the agreement with GEOSOFT. This Agreement supersedes all previous Agreements with respect to the Licensed Programs, with the exception of a current signed Technical Service Agreements. GEOSOFT is not responsible for failure to fulfill its obligations under the Agreement due to causes beyond its control. Should any part of This Agreement for any reason be declared invalid, such declaration shall not affect the remaining portion which shall remain in full force and effect as if this Agreement had been executed without the invalid portion thereof. The relationship between the parties is that of independent contractors. Nothing contained in this Agreement shall be deemed to constitute or create a partnership, association, joint venture or agency. The provision of this Agreement shall be binding upon me and GEOSOFT and my respective successors and permitted assigns. This Agreement will be governed by the laws of the Province of Ontario and applicable laws of Canada. 11. YEAR 2000: The Licensed Programs have been tested to conform to DISC PD2000 1:1998 Year 2000 Conformity Requirements (www.bsi.org.uk/disc/year2000/2000.html), with the exception of clause 3.3.2, paragraph b. Section 3.3.2 paragraph b) requires that inferences for two-digit year dates greater than or equal to 50 imply 19xx, and those with a value equal to or less than 50 imply 20xx. The Licensed Programs will recognize all two digit years as 19xx. This is to prevent errors importing historical data that pre-dates 1950. All dates that follow 1999 must use four digit dates in the Licensed Programs.
3
Finding More Help Information There are several other functions included in the basic Oasis montaj help system that may be useful to your work. The entire documentation for the system is available through the online help system. This electronic library of information enables us to constantly update the information and provide you with the most up-to-date information available. The best way to find information in this system is to use the Search tab to perform a full-text search of all help topics. If you still can’t find the information you’re looking for, the Manuals, Tutorials and Technical Notes help system contains complete Geosoft manuals and tutorials in Adobe Acrobat PDF format. Contacting Technical Support The list below provides contact information for Geosoft Technical Support around the world. Note that, technical support is for Licensed Users Only. North America
Europe and North Africa
Geosoft Inc., 85 Richmond St. W., 8th Floor Toronto, Ont., Canada M5H 2C9
Geosoft Europe Ltd. 20/21 Market Place, First Floor Wallingford, Oxfordshire OX10 OAD United Kingdom
Tel. (416) 369-0111 Fax (416) 369-9599
Tel: +44 1491 835 231 Fax: +44 1491 835 281 Email:
[email protected]
Email:
[email protected] South America
Australia and Southeast Asia
Geosoft Latinoamerica Ltda. Praça Floriano 51 / 19º Andar CEP: 20031-050, Centro Rio de Janeiro, RJ, Brasil
Geosoft Australia Pty. Ltd 350 Hay Street Subiaco WA 6008 Australia
Tel: (55-21) 2532-0140 Fax: (55-21) 2532-7197
Tel 61 (8) 9382 1900 Fax 61 (8) 9382-1911
Email:
[email protected]
Email:
[email protected]
South and Central Africa Geosoft Africa Ltd. Buren Building, Second Floor Kasteelpark Office Park c/o Nossob & Jochemus Streets Erasmuskloof X3, Pretoria Tel: 27 12 347 4519 Fax: 27 12 347 6936 Email:
[email protected]
4 Geosoft Concepts
Geosoft Concepts This chapter contains information about the components included in Oasis montaj™ and describes the concepts you will need to know to use the system. A quick overview of the concepts described in this chapter are available in the Oasis montaj Viewer help system in the About directory called Tour for New Users. Oasis montaj is Geosoft’s core software platform for working with large volume spatial data. The core software platform consists of a free Viewer and a licensed Mapping and Processing System. Oasis montaj Viewer The Oasis montaj Viewer is a free software product that enables you to view Geosoft databases, Geosoft Grids and a variety of common image and data exchange formats. Specifically, this version provides you with the following capabilities: • Access Geosoft project data (databases, profiles, grids, voxels, maps), ArcGIS MXD files, maps, tools (3D Tool and Project Explorer) and Geosoft tool bars (Database Tools, Map Layout, Map Tools, and Standard) • Evaluate data, information and interpretations by viewing and performing specific tasks using Geosoft databases, profiles, maps, and grids as well as Geosoft and third-party images (including Geosoft PLT, AutoCAD DXF, MapInfo TAB, ArcView SHP, ArcGIS LYR, and Microstation DGN files) • Verify data quality, analyses and interpretations by tracking processes applied to databases and maps • Perform selected processes made available through Geosoft menus or third-party GXs • Share results and knowledge by viewing and/or sending E-maps and 3D PDF files (see the Export To PDF 3D for more details) to team members and other professional contacts • Prepare reports by exporting to 3D PDF or using clipboard image copying capabilities For more information on the free Viewer visit www.geosoft.com Oasis montaj Mapping and Processing System The Oasis montaj Mapping and Processing System contains a cross-section of builtin data import, processing, analysis, visualization, mapping, and integration capabilities. This system enables you to perform complex processing, editing, mapping, and interpretation tasks including the ability to: • Access project editing tools (Undo/Redo Tool, Map Group Editing Bar, Map Template Tools Bar, Polygon Edit Bar and Script Bar) and project auxiliary tools (Histograms, Scatter plots, Probability plots and Triplots)
Geosoft Concepts 5
• • • •
• • •
Create, import, and export: databases, profiles, maps, grids, voxels, images, and ArcGIS MXD files Process data using Geosoft’s gridding, contouring and 1D filter algorithms Advanced grid utilities and gridding toolkit Design and layout maps, consisting of base maps, grids, images, customized annotations, labels, colour symbols, multi-parameter symbol plotting, and other entities Advanced CAD tools to draw interpretation features on your maps Drag-n-Drop Geosoft grids, maps and databases and XYZ files for quick viewing Automate tasks using scripts
The Oasis montaj environment provides direct access to data contained in Oasis databases through a spreadsheet window and an integrated profile display window. The Oasis database is a high-performance database that provides efficient storage and access for very large spatial data sets. The Mapping and Processing System enables you to edit maps and ArcGIS MXD files interactively, applying dynamic linking to maps and track the map creation processes. Visual data links are provided to dynamically connect data in the spreadsheet, profile, grid, map and ArcGIS MXD views. Data processing is achieved through the application of Geosoft eXecutable functions (GXs), which can be used to control all aspects of the data processing sequence and environment. DAT Technology (for Accessing Grids and Images) enables the platform to use a variety of grid and image formats in Oasis montaj. The Oasis montaj core platform provides the basic resources for all Geosoft Applications and Tools. Geosoft provides a variety of systems that address specific applications in exploration geophysics, drillhole geology, exploration geochemistry and other areas. These systems consist of menus and corresponding Geosoft eXecutables (GXs) that run on the core platform.
6 Geosoft Concepts
Why Oasis montaj? The concept of an integrated environment for earth science data processing and analysis emerged from over two decades of software development at Geosoft and is now implemented in the Oasis montaj software platform. Geosoft’s vision reflects the fast pace of today’s professional work environment and the significant changes in data processing over the past twenty years: • • •
An order of magnitude increase in data volumes and increase in digital data availability and connectivity Shift in processing from office to in situ (or field) environments Replacement of proprietary software with commercial solutions
By design, Geosoft’s Oasis montaj software platform meets specific needs including: • • • •
• • • • •
•
•
• •
Project Explorer Tool enables users to browse as well as open any ‘project’ item and provides project items in convenient dropdown lists Metadata Tool provides a context-oriented, interactive way to view and edit attributes assigned to Geosoft data View/Group Manager Tool enables users to manage and edit map View and/or Groups Drag-n-Drop display technology enables users to drag-n-drop Geosoft grids (*.GRD), maps (*.MAP), databases (*.GDB) and XYZ files (*.XYZ) for quick viewing of data 3D Mapping enables users to view their data in 3-dimensions, providing a realworld view of their data Snapshot (bookmark) of currently viewed map extents enables users to quickly and easily capture and return to a favourite location on their map 3D verticle exageration is also now available ‘True transparency’ has been added and is automatically enabled, with video cards that support it. Electronic licensing model enables Licenses to be handled by the Geosoft license server enabling licenses to be moved between machines online, or via email or disk (where necessary). Geosoft’s DAP (Data Access Protocol) technology enables users to access very large spatial datasets residing on an Internet Server (or locally on a Personal Computer). Connecting you to your data and information via dynamic linking – a unique technology for graphically connecting data, profiles and maps in a single desktop environment Addressing high-volume processing requirements while delivering focused solutions to specific Earth Science problems Free Oasis montaj Viewer for Data and Information Sharing
Geosoft Concepts 7
Keeping you in touch with your data An important design strategy in Oasis montaj was to keep you in touch with your data. In fact, the system is intended to connect you with your data and information in several unique ways: • By providing an integrated environment that holds all of your project information • By enabling quick and easy access all your project data via the Project Explorer including; databases, grids, maps, tools and metadata information • By providing unique views of data (spreadsheet, profile and map) • By connecting you to data and information in these views (through a specialized dynamic linking technology) • By delivering a wide variety of algorithms and techniques • By “memorizing” the processing you apply to data and maps by means of a proprietary process “maker” technology. This capability is especially useful for quickly testing and optimizing processing parameters. It also keeps a record of processing so that you can remember your settings if you stop working on your project and later return to it. Geosoft’s approach is intended to give you a means of keeping in close contact with your original and processed data and information — from start to finish. As you use the system, you will find your own ways to take advantage of these capabilities.
The remainder of this section provides some brief details about projects, databases, maps, views, dynamic links and process makers.
8 Geosoft Concepts
Projects and the Project Explorer To work in Oasis montaj requires an open Project. An Oasis montaj "Project" encompasses every item in your working project; from the data files in your project (databases, maps, and grids), to the tools used (including auxiliary tools such as histograms, scatter plots etc), to the project setup including the menus you have displayed and whether you are working on a map or profile and the state in which you left it the last time you used it. The Project Explorer enables you to browse as well as open any project item. The project file (*.gpf) is used to keep track of all information related to a working project. The Project Explorer has two windows, the Data window that includes all data files included in the project and the Tools window that organizes and maintains the project tools.
Project Explorer Data Tab
Project Explorer Tools Tab
Some of the capabilities of the Project Explorer are: • Keeps track of all files and using the description and metadata tools enables you to keep track of project information. Note that, in previous versions, file information was maintained in the file system and the user had to keep track of what the files were.
Geosoft Concepts 9
•
• • • •
Explorer tools including; Tools, Toolbars and Auxiliary Tools (licensed version only) • Tools; 3D Tool, Metadata Tool, Project Explorer and Undo/Redo Map Edit Tool • Auxiliary Tools: Histograms, Probability plots, Scatter plots, and TriPlots • Toolbars; Database Tools bar, Map Edit Bar, Map Tools Bar, Polygon Edit Bar, Script Bar and Standard Bar File locations displayed in popup dialog when you mouse over item in the Project Explorer Data Description Tool enable users to add description to project items Enhanced metadata capabilities enable access to the "View Metadata" of all data items displayed in the Project Explorer Recent Projects & recent Geosoft data files available under File menu
Note:
Grids appear in the Project Explorer under "Grids". Opening a grid opens a view of the grid in its own internal "map". A grid map view is just like a real map and can accept any graphics that a map can. It can also be saved as a map, in which case the map will appear in the "Map" section of the project explorer. Whenever you create a grid in Oasis montaj it will be placed in the "Grids" section of the Project Explorer. Some applications will also open the grid for you to see it in the data viewing area. You can also open a grid for viewing by double-clicking on the grid name, by dragging and dropping it into the data viewing, or by dropping it onto an open map, in which case it will be placed into the default data view. When a grid is opened in its own window, you will see it either in a default "equal-area" colouring scheme, or in the last colour scheme that was used to look at the grid. The grid is actually displayed using a "map" window that functions just like a real map window. This means that the shadow cursors will trace locations from other windows and all the normal map drawing and viewing tools will work just as they do in other map windows. However, this view is only meant for temporary viewing of the grid and for "scratch-pad" type rendering of graphics. If you do add any additional graphics to the grid window you will be asked if you want to save the changes to a new map when you close the window. If you choose not to save changes, all graphics that you have added to the grid view will be lost.
What you need to know about Project files You require an open project to do any work in Oasis montaj. The project also controls your working directory. Projects are saved as (*.gpf) files. If you open an existing project from a directory, the system assumes that your files are located in the specified directory. To streamline your work, as well as keep it organized, you may want to make sure that your project is in the same directory as the other files you want to use.
10 Geosoft Concepts
We recommend that each project you work on have its own project (*.gpf) file. If you use a number of applications or add-on tools in Oasis montaj that have different menus, you can use the project to display only the menus you require.
Metadata Metadata (data about data) is captured by Oasis montaj from the first time the data is touched. The metadata information, which is based on ISO 19115 standards, is stored inside the data (if supported) or as a companion XML file. When you import or work with data in Oasis montaj, User name, Date, Time and any actions performed on the data will be maintained in the Metadata. When data is derived from other data, the Metadata is passed on and the lineage of what was done to the data is maintained in the Lineage section. Viewing and Editing Metadata Attributes (or metadata), information about data, can be simple or complex and the descriptive needs of different kinds of data are infinitely diverse. To allow for this and provide flexibility, Geosoft developed the XML Metadata Viewer and Metadata Editor to help you organize your metadata. Even though each Geosoft data type (Database, Grid, Map, ArcGIS MXD, Voxel, etc) exhibits many different attributes, using these tools are easy. The current selection drives what exists inside the tool. T O V IEW / E DIT
YOUR
M ETADATA:
1. From the Project Explorer window, you can select the data of interest, right-click
and from the popup menu, select Metadata. The Metadata Viewer will be displayed. or 2. From the Database (or Map, ArcGIS MXD, Grid and Image, 3D Tools) menu(s),
select Metadata. The Database Metadata dialog (or the appropriate data type dialog i.e. Map Metadata, MXD Metadata, etc) will be displayed.
3. Using the Browse button, locate the Database file and click the [OK] button (or
Map file, ArcGIS MXD file, etc). The Metadata – tfmag dialog is displayed.
Geosoft Concepts 11
4. Use this dialog to View the Metadata associated with the selected database file.
The Stylesheet dropdown list enables you to select from 3 stylesheets (Geosoft, Geosoft ISO 19139 and Xml). 5. To edit the Metadata, click the [Edit] button and the Edit Metadata dialog will be
displayed.
12 Geosoft Concepts
6. You can use this dialog to edit the Metadata associated with the selected database
file. Selecting the [General], [Location], and [Data] buttons, enables you to access the different types of Metadata. 7. Click the [Save] button to save your edits and then click the [Close] button to
close the Edit Metadata dialog and return you to the Metadata Viewer. 8.
You can review your changes and then click the [OK] button to close the window.
Metadata Tool The Metadata Tool is a context-oriented, interactive method for viewing and editing attributes assigned to DAP Data, Geosoft Global Settings, etc. Note: Values displayed in a grey box cannot be edited. Values displayed in a white box may be edited. T O V IEW M ETADATA T OOL : 1. On the GX menu, select Global Settings|Advanced. The advanced global settings
will be displayed in the Metadata Tool.
Geosoft Concepts 13
2. To close the dialog, click the [Cancel] button.
14 Geosoft Concepts
Databases and high-volume data processing Many commercial and governmental groups currently use Oasis montaj for routine processing of high volume datasets (tested up to 10 gigabytes) and also for relatively low volume processing in a variety of mapping and other applications. One key to the system’s capabilities is the proprietary 3-dimensional database architecture, which enables the rapid processing and analysis of high volume data. This object-oriented database structure stores data in a form that enables rapid access and efficient storage of your data. Databases are displayed and organized in Oasis Montaj in the Spreadsheet Window. The spreadsheet window organizes and displays data differently than conventional (relational) spreadsheet and database programs. Conventional databases organize data as tables, records and fields, as shown below:
Conventional databases organize data as tables, records and fields. This is effective for querying and searching type applications but limits it as a data processing engine because: • Programs must read an entire record to access a single field • It is computationally intensive to change record structures • Data sampled at different intervals and starting points are difficult to store Oasis montaj is based on a proprietary 3-dimensional-file format architecture that overcomes these limitations, as shown below:
Geosoft Concepts 15
Organized in lines (or groups), columns and elements, the database stores all data values of a particular type in individual columns or channels. This enables standalone processing of columns and eliminates the need to write results to interim storage areas and then re-write them after processing. The result is a significant increase in processing efficiency. This Geosoft file structure provides additional advantages including: • Ability to process any number of lines/groups • Ability to handle lines/groups with unlimited columns • Ability to handle very large datasets In addition, since columns are stored separately, this file format is capable of storing and manipulating data with different end point and sample intervals.
16 Geosoft Concepts
Spreadsheets are the windows to your database When you create or open a database, you see a spreadsheet. The Spreadsheet view is your “window” to the Oasis montaj database and it also provides you with flexibility in setting up your working environment. All data is stored securely in the underlying database — you simply decide which data you want to display in the spreadsheet and keep all other data in the background, hidden from view. The spreadsheet is organized in rows, channels (columns) and lines (also called groups in other applications such as drillhole plotting). Rows and columns work similar to standard spreadsheets in that you can edit and delete them as needed. The system also enables multiple “worksheets” in your database – depending on the type of data you are working with (line, random line or drillhole); the worksheets have different names. To see what type of name is used, look at the Line Header Cell located at the top left corner of the spreadsheet. An “L” for example, indicates that you are working with line data.
General spreadsheet capabilities include: • The ability to display data from your database through a spreadsheet window • Handling of any sample interval • Supports full editing and mathematical processing capabilities
Geosoft Concepts 17
•
The ability to process selected samples, selected channels and selected lines or groups
How the Spreadsheet Displays Project Data The spreadsheet does not display your actual data, but rather a view of the data. Depending on your type of project, the spreadsheet will display your data as either values or arrays. For surveys where a single value is recorded at each station, for example a magnetic survey, each data cell will contain a single value.
For surveys where a multiple readings where recorded at each station, for example an Induced Polarization survey, each data cell will contain multiple values.
The spreadsheet represents these values as a profile line in an array channel.
18 Geosoft Concepts
Profiles and viewing your data graphically The Profile view is your “graphical window” to the Oasis montaj database. You can display profiles of one or more variables in your database simply by selecting the channel and selecting a simple menu item. The profile appears directly below its corresponding database in a profile window. You can have up to five “panes” with 32 variables in each pane. A key point to note about profile windows is that they are linked dynamically to their corresponding database. When you select a value or range of values in either the database or profile window respectively, they are also highlighted in the other window. This capability keeps you in touch with your data and gives you an interactive means of accomplishing quality control or analysis tasks.
Geosoft Concepts 19
Maps are more than printed sheets of information Geosoft’s mapping capabilities are the result of more than a decade of programming development, and the options for producing and editing maps — as well as the quality of output — reflect this level of experience. You can use the system to produce a variety of professional presentations quickly and easily. However, you should also be aware that a map is more than a printed sheet of information in Oasis montaj; the Map view gives you an electronic area for analyzing, visualizing and editing your data and information.
When you create a new map the system opens up a new blank Map Window. After a Map Window is open, you can add a wide variety of data- and base map-related information. Oasis montaj Maps use Views to organize and display information. A View divides the information on a map into a Base view, which uses paper coordinates, and a Data view, which uses ground coordinates. Map surrounds, north arrows, and scale bars are examples of map groups plotted in the Base view. Map coordinates, contours, and grids are examples of map groups that are plotted in the Data view. Groups are a fundamental part of maps.. Oasis montaj uses Groups to determine the order in which objects are displayed (rendered) on a map. Groups are layered on top of each other in a specific order determined by the Map View/Group Manager Tool. You can create, edit, move, hide, and mask groups. You can also move groups in front and behind each other. Any new object you add to a map, such as a polygon or line, is added to the current group. Oasis montaj now supports on-the-fly image re-projection, so images may be used in a single map (previously, images that used plug-ins would not re-project and you had to create a separate map to display the image). Also the speed of redrawing re-
20 Geosoft Concepts
projected data groups on maps has been improved significantly. True transparency has also been added and is automatically enabled, with video cards that support it. For users who don’t have true transparency supporting video cards, the ‘Light table’ display technology is used.With this technology, each group or layer in a map has individual transparency settings, controlled from the View/Group manager. These transparency settings affect both 2D and 3D raster images and vector line work.
As you use the system, you will become familiar with the information that is stored in each type of View and how to manipulate them (for example, by turning off a map layer for plotting purposes). And as shown in the next section, you will also learn to activate dynamic links between databases, profiles and maps so that you can perform advanced processing (selection of parameters) as well as interactive analysis and visualization.
Geosoft Concepts 21
ArcGIS MXD Files in Oasis montaj ArcMap, the main application in the ArcGIS Desktop suite, is used for all mapping and editing tasks as well as for map-based query and analysis. An MXD map is the most common document type for users working with geographic information within ArcMap. In Oasis montaj you can now open MXDs and view and manipulate them in a similar fashion as in ArcMap. This enables ArcGIS desktop users to share maps created in that environment with Oasis montaj users. Users can even drag layers to Geosoft maps or the montaj background to make new maps. It is also possible to use drag-n-drop to place a Geosoft group from the View/Group Manager Tool into a MXD map. An MXD represents geographic information as a collection of layers and other elements in a map view. Common map elements include; the data frame containing map layers for a given extent, a scale bar, north arrow, title, descriptive text, and a symbol legend. There are two primary display panels in an Oasis montaj MXD window: the data frame and the layout view. The data frame provides a geographic "window", or map frame, in which you can display and work with geographic information as a series of map layers. The layout view provides a page view where map elements (such as the data frame, a scale bar, and a map title) are arranged on a page.
22 Geosoft Concepts
When you save a MXD you have created in ArcMap or Oasis montaj, it uses the file extension .mxd. MXD document files are managed in file system folders. You can work with an existing .mxd in Oasis montaj by opening it from the ArcGIS MXD menu. This will open an MXD window which enables you to switch between data frame and layout view mode. You can save the visible layers and certain layout elements to a new Geosoft map. It is also possible to create new MXDs in this menu at some predefined page sizes or to save a Geosoft map as an MXD. You can also save a map layer definition as an ArcMap .lyr file and add it in an exisiting MXD window in the project using the toolbar or import it into a Geosoft map. One special feature that Oasis montaj adds in addition to the normal ArcMap tools in the toolbars is the dynamic linking using the Shadow Cursor Tool (see below).
Dynamically link data and information to knowledge Dynamic links are a key part of Geosoft’s strategy of helping professional’s stay in close touch with their data—from import to processing to analysis. By definition, dynamic links are interactive graphical connections that you can activate between databases, profiles and any number of maps in your project. When you activate links
Geosoft Concepts 23
and select any item or position in a database, profile or map, a cursor automatically connects the item or point in all items. This capability gives you an important means of visualizing original or processed results in any view and seeing the corresponding representation in another view. The practical benefit is that you can quickly perform quality control, processing or analysis using all available data and information. Applying dynamic linking is also a highly efficient approach to building knowledge and making informed decisions.
24 Geosoft Concepts
Geosoft Algorithms and Techniques The Geosoft eXecutable (GX) is the basic mechanism through which Geosoft provides the basic resources for all Geosoft Applications and Tools. GXs are programmed processes that are attached to the main menus in the system and to the special menus used in application suites. GXs run interactively in the graphical user interface but many GXs can also run in batch mode (using script commands).
All Geosoft GXs are signed. A Geosoft signed GX is a GX written and tested by Geosoft. It contains no viruses or code that can harm your system. As a user you can trust that this GX works and is safe to use. Non-signed GXs will generate a report warning the user that there could be a problem with the GX or its contents, and that Geosoft did not test or create this GX. Individual users can create GXs using the GX Developer Toolkit. Geosoft’s own developers also use this product to develop applications. The GX Developer is designed for users who consider them selves to be computer-oriented scientists (i.e. you do not have to be a computer scientist to use it effectively). If you encounter a non-Geosoft GX a report warning will be displayed notifying you that this is not a Geosoft signed GX. Third party developers are also creating GXs and the product offers many opportunities for integrating other products into the system either via DLLs or by directly accessing Geosoft’s database and function library. For more information, please contact your Geosoft representative. The following dialog box shows a standard GX dialog box. Geosoft now supports Visual Basic and .NET programming so that users can create even more advanced dialogs boxes as required for their specific applications.
Geosoft Concepts 25
Process Maker technology brings dynamic linking to data processing A dynamic process link is a built-in feature that remembers the processing parameters associated with a specific object such as a channel, grid or map and that enables you to quickly rerun the process using different settings. A quick tool for reprocessing data, the process link is also useful for remembering processing settings. This latter capability is particularly effective if you are away from your project for any length of time and want to recall the settings you were using. To access the maker for any object, select the object and click the right mouse button. The last item in the popup menu is the maker associated with the object. Select this option and you will see the corresponding dialog box and settings. You can either change settings and re-process, or exit from the dialog as required.
Oasis montaj 27
Oasis montaj Oasis montaj is Geosoft’s core software platform for working with large volume spatial data and provides the functionality required to locate, manage, visualise, manipulate, display and share located Earth Science data. The Oasis montaj environment provides direct access to data contained in Oasis databases through a spreadsheet window and an integrated profile display window. The Oasis database is a high-performance database that provides efficient storage and access for very large spatial data sets. The interface provides visual data links that enable you to dynamically connect data in the spreadsheet, profile, map and ArcGIS MXD views. DAT Technology (for Accessing Grids and Images) enables the Interface to use a variety of grid and image formats in Oasis montaj. The Oasis montaj Mapping and Processing System provides the basic resources for all Geosoft Applications and extensions. Geosoft provides a variety of systems that address specific applications in exploration geophysics, drillhole geology, exploration geochemistry and other areas. These systems consist of menus and corresponding Geosoft executables (GXs) that run on the core platform. Mapping and Processing System The Oasis montaj Mapping and Processing System contains a cross-section of builtin data import, processing, analysis, visualization, mapping, and integration capabilities. This system enables you to perform complex processing, editing, mapping, and interpretation tasks including the ability to: • Create, import, and export: maps, databases, grids, voxels, MXD files, images, and profiles • Automatic Metadata Creation. Oasis montaj creates metadata automatically when you work with data, storing the name of the user, date, time, and actions performed. A XML Metadata viewer and editor enables easy access to your metadata. • Process data using Geosoft’s gridding, contouring and 1D filter algorithms • Advanced grid utilities and gridding toolkit • 3-dimensional mapping that includes a range of options for visualizing data including; voxels, multiple surfaces and sections, each with own relief and contents, and each with its own orientation in 3D space • Design and layout maps, consisting of base maps, grids, images, customized annotations, labels, colour symbols, multi-parameter symbol plotting, and other entities • Drag-n-Drop Geosoft grids, maps and databases and XYZ files for quick viewing • Advanced CAD tools to draw interpretation features on your maps • Automate tasks using scripts
28 Oasis montaj
Getting Started This section describes the basic installation and set-up procedures for getting started with Oasis montaj. Topics discussed in this chapter include: • Finding More Help Information (page 3) • Software and hardware requirements (page 28) • Oasis montaj eLicensing (page 28) • Installing Oasis montaj (page 30) • Park your eLicense (page 31) • Transfer your eLicense (page 32) • Updating your eLicense (page 33) • Setting High-Resolution Graphics (page 33) • Configuring Oasis montaj Settings (page 33)-
Software and Hardware Requirements To run Oasis montaj, you require the following software and hardware: Operating System
XP required (2000,95,98,ME,NT not supported), Vista Business Edition under compatibility testing
CPU
No requirement on a specific CPU type. An Intel Celeron processor is not recommended
RAM
2 GB recommended, 512 MB required
Graphics
256MB 3D (DirectX and OpenGL) Accelerated graphics card recommended.
Printer/Plotter
Any Windows® supported colour printer. Hewlett Packard® large-format ink-jet plotters are recommended
Installation
Oasis montaj MUST be installed by a user with Local Administration rights on the machine.
Installation Disk Space
1 GB or more of free space on the Program Files drive is required for the installation process
Data Disk Space
Data disk space depends on the volume of project data to be processed and the printer driver you are using, however 100 GB is recommended. This is largely based on your business and data requirements.
Internet
To use the Internet capabilities in Oasis montaj, you will need to install Internet Explorer 5.0 or later. This does not mean that you have to have Internet Explorer as your default browser; Oasis montaj just uses the Internet connection technology supplied in IE5
Oasis montaj 29
Oasis montaj eLicensing With Geosoft’s electronic licensing (eLicensing) model, licenses are handled by the Geosoft license server. This system enables licenses to be moved between machines online, via email or if necessary by disk. Geosoft’s eLicensing management system offers many tangible and real benefits, including: • Regular upgrades and fixes. We release multiple upgrades a year (with interim patches when possible). You can only access these with a valid eLicense. • Transfer license from office to home computer without re-installing all software. • Add new products to your license instantly. • Evaluate products easily - for 30 days. • Easy to manage "1 user - 1 license" model. • Reduces costs by eliminating unauthorized use. • Rent modules for specific time periods. • The eLicensing technology also enables us to add extra services and products on a regular basis. • It may take some time to get used to the system and there are some restrictions that apply: • Licenses are keyed to individual PCs. Therefore; you must park the eLicense to switch computers. • Must park before changing Operating System (for a new hard drive, for example). The following Geosoft License Manager options enable you to manage your eLicense: Install eLicense – Installs your eLicense, using your ‘license key’, from the Geosoft license server. Show computer ID – Displays your computer ID, a unique alpha-numeric string that identifies your computer and is used to link your Geosoft license to your computer. View eLicense – Displays your eLicense information. Update eLicense – Updates your eLicense from the Geosoft license server. Park eLicense – Parks your eLicense on the Geosoft license server, enabling it to be retrieved later. Transfer eLicense – Transfers eLicense to a different computer ID. Lock eLicense – Locks eLicense on the current computer. Unlock eLicense – Unlocks eLicense from the computer using the ‘License key’.
30 Oasis montaj
Installing Oasis montaj Oasis montaj is installed either from the CD-ROM. The installation method will vary depending on your operating system. When “installing” Oasis montaj you MUST be logged on as Administrator. To use the Internet capabilities in Oasis montaj, you will need to install Internet Explorer 5.0 or later. This does not mean that you have to have Internet Explorer as your default browser; Oasis montaj just uses the Internet connection technology supplied in IE5 to connect to the web. Install from the Oasis montaj CD ROM Please note that your installation procedure will vary slightly depending on the operating system you are using. 1. Insert the Oasis montaj CD into your CD-ROM drive. The InstallShield Wizard
Setup dialog is displayed and tells you that the system is preparing the installation. 2. When ready, the program displays the Geosoft Oasis Montaj – InstallShield
Wizard Welcome screen. To continue, follow the directions on the screens that appear. 3. When the "Installation Completed" dialog is displayed, you can check the boxes
provided to launch Oasis Montaj or view the release notes. 4. Click the [Finish] button to complete the installation process. 5. To install your eLicense, new Oasis montaj users refer to the Install your
eLicense (New User) instructions below, current Oasis montaj users please refer to the Upgrade Oasis montaj instructions. Install your eLicense (New User) Your eLicense is installed from the Geosoft license server, online, via email or if necessary by disk. T O I NSTALL
YOUR E L ICENSE AS A
N EW U SER :
1. Connect to the Internet. 2. On the Start menu select, Programs/Geosoft/Oasis montaj/License/Setup (or
double click on the Oasis montaj icon). The Geosoft License Manager dialog will be displayed. 3. In the "License Key" box, enter your 8-digit alphanumeric license key (provided
with your CD-ROM) and click the [Internet] button. Geosoft’s license server will retrieve your license from our Internet server and download it to your computer. 4. All of the software you are licensed for will now be accessible to you.
Oasis montaj 31
Install from the Oasis montaj CD and/or upgrade to current version Currrent users or new users who have the Oasis montaj CD can install and then upgrade their Oasis montaj software to the current version by following the instructions provided below. T O I NSTALL
FROM THE
CD
AND UPGRADE TO
C URRENT V ERSION :
1. Insert the Oasis montaj CD into your CD-ROM drive. The InstallShield Wizard
Setup dialog is displayed and tells you that the system is preparing the installation. 2. When ready, the program displays the Geosoft Oasis Montaj – InstallShield
Wizard Welcome screen. To continue, follow the directions on the screens that appear. 3. When the "Installation Completed" dialog is displayed, check the box provided to
launch Oasis Montaj. 4. Click the [Finish] button to complete the installation process and launch Oasis
montaj. The Geosoft License Manager dialog will be displayed. 5. In the "License Key" box, enter your 8-digit alphanumeric license key (provided
with your CD-ROM) and click the [Internet] button. Geosoft’s license server will retrieve your license from our Internet server and download it to your computer and all of the software you are licensed for will now be accessible to you. 6. On the Help menu, select Check for Updates. The Oasis montaj InstallShield
Updates page is displayed. 7. Click the [Show Updates] button and the currently available Updates will be
displayed. 8. Click the [Add] button to select the Update, and the [Next>] button will be
enabled. 9. Click the [Next>] button and you will be presented with the option to Download
or Install the Update. If you choose to Install, we recommend that you close Oasis montaj at this point. Follow the instructions provided to complete the process.
Parking (Uninstalling) your eLicense The Oasis montaj eLicensing technology enables users to park their eLicense on the Geosoft license server, enabling it to be retrieved later. To Park (or Uninstall) your eLicense 1. Connect to the Internet. 2. On the File menu, select License/Park License. 3. The Geosoft License Manager dialog will be displayed. This is a warning
message that tells you that parking a license places your license on the Geosoft
32 Oasis montaj
license server so that it may be installed on a different computer for your own personal use. Your license is non-transferable, and use of the license by anyone but you may be a violation of your license agreement. 4. It then asks you if you are sure you want to park your license? Click the [Yes]
button. Your license is uploaded to the Geosoft license server to be downloaded at a later time and Oasis montaj closes.
Transferring your eLicense Your eLicense can be transferred to a different computer ID (i.e. transferring your license from your desktop to a laptop or visa-versa). Before you can transfer your eLicense you must determine the computer ID for the target computer (computer you wish to install the license on). View Computer ID on target computer 1. Install Oasis Montaj on your second computer (as shown above). 2. On the Start menu select, Programs/Geosoft/Oasis montaj/License/View
Computer ID. The Geosoft License Manager dialog will be displayed. The alphanumeric ID displayed in this window is your “Computer ID”. 3. Copy this number for use in the next step and Click the [OK] button to close the
window. Transfer eLicense 1. On the computer that currently has your eLicensed installed, open Oasis montaj
and connect to the Internet. 2. On the File menu, select License/Transfer License. The Geosoft License Manager
dialog is displayed. 3. In the "Target Computer ID" box, enter the computer ID of the target computer
i.e. the computer you wish to install the license on and click the [OK] button. 4. Your eLicense is now linked to the new computer ID and can be downloaded
from the Geosoft license server or sent via email to the "Target Computer". Install the Transfered eLicense: 1. Connect to the Internet. 2. On the Start menu select, Programs/Geosoft/Oasis montaj/License/Setup. The
Geosoft License Manager dialog will be displayed. 3. In the "License Key" box, enter your 8-digit alphanumeric license key (provided
when you "Transfered" your license) and click the [Internet] button. Geosoft’s license server will retrieve your transfered license from our Internet server and download it to your computer.
Oasis montaj 33 4. All of the software you are licensed for will now be accessible to you on your
other computer.
Updating your eLicense You can update your eLicense (i.e. access additional applications or add-on tools) by first contacting your local Geosoft representative and then simply connecting to the Geosoft license server. 1. Contact your local Geosoft representative about adding additional applications or
add-on tools. 2. Open Oasis montaj and connect to the Internet. 3. On the File menu, select License/Update License. Your eLicense is updated with
the new licensed products.
Lock and Unlock eLicenses The Lock and Unlock eLicenses options is used primarily by administrators of large numbers of eLicenses. It is used to control and restrict the movement of licenses and to prevent misappropriation and loss.
Setting High-Resolution Graphics In order to view the colours in your maps and grids correctly, you may have to change your video card settings. 1. Click right mouse button on desktop screen. 2. On the Properties menu, click Settings. 3. Set the colour palette to High Colour 16-bit or True Colour 24-bit.
Configuring Oasis montaj Settings Before you start working with Oasis montaj you may want to configure your other default settings. The program will work correctly with all of the standard default settings; however these may be changed to reflect your personal requirements or those of your computer. The default settings are the selections made for many of the programs where there is no user input and are designed to yield logical results. You may overwrite some of these intelligent defaults in normal use but this should not create any problems since the defaults are only intended to get you started with the system and may change as your knowledge of the system increases. T O C HANGE
THE
D EFAULT S ETTINGS
OF THE
O ASIS
MONTAJ
E NVIRONMENT
1. On the GX menu, select Global Settings and then select General. The Default
settings dialog is displayed..
34 Oasis montaj 2. Select the desired choices from the available selections. You need not change any
selections at this time. Once you are more familiar with Geosoft, you may come back to alter the settings.
The following list summarizes some of the more frequently changed settings: Default menus
Select the menu files (.omn) to load as the default menus when creating a new project. If more than one menu is selected, each menu must be separated by the | character.
Default grid colour table
Select the default colour table to use for displaying grids.
Default map font
Select the default map font. The file TRUETYPE.INI will be modified to map the "default" font from Geosoft PLT files to the TrueType font specified here. To change the mappings of other Geosoft fonts you can modify the TRUETYPE.INI file directly.
Default symbol font
Select the default Geosoft symbol font (*.gfn).
3. Clicking the [Next>] button displays the More settings dialog, as shown below:
Oasis montaj 35
The following list summarizes some of the more frequently changed settings: Default input grid format
Select the input grid format you would like to use by default.
Default output grid format
Select the output grid format you would like to use by default.
Default grid element type
This is the default grid element type to use for Geosoft grids. If grids will be used with Geosoft DOS programs, select "16bit (DOS compatible)".
Error level reporting
If All errors are selected, you will see more error messages each time an error occurs. This is useful for GX programmers who may need to see more error context when debugging GX’s.
Print memory (megabytes)
Select the amount of RAM you would like the Geosoft print driver to use when printing. This only effects print configurations that use the Geosoft drivers. Enter 0 to use the default, which is 33% of the total physical RAM available on the system. The Geosoft print driver will slice each print job into bands of this size. The more RAM you use for printing, the faster printing will be. If you specify too much RAM, it is possible to significantly diminish the performance of other tasks on the computer. This amount should normally not exceed 50% of the installed RAM on your system, although we will allow the value to be up to 75% of the available RAM. This setting is not used by the Windows driver. If you use the Windows print driver, the printing process will use
36 Oasis montaj virtual memory up to the size required by the print. This can be up to 600 MB for A0 (E) size plots. We recommend that you use the Geosoft drivers when working with large plotters. Image Cache
Select the amount of virtual RAM you would like to reserve for the image cache. As images are displayed in Oasis Montaj, an efficient access version of the image will be stored in the cache if there is room. The cache copy of the image greatly improves the performance of rendering the image when zoom/pan/redraw operations are performed. If there is insufficient room in the cache, the image will always be rendered from the DAT interface, which is slower. We recommend that you should set the image cache size to about 4 times the largest images that you routinely work with. Note that the image cache will be created in the GEOTEMP directory, and there must be sufficient room to hold the cache plus other Geosoft temporary files. The image cache should not be more than 50% of the available room in GEOTEMP.
4. Clicking the [Next>] button displays the Internet settings dialog, as shown below:
5. This dialog enables you to control the type of Internet connection you have. If
your browser accesses the internet through a proxy server or firewall, set the type to "Proxy Server/Firewall". This will use the POST HTTP command instead of the GET http command and should enable Oasis montaj to access the internet through your proxy/firewall connection. Advanced Settings The Oasis montaj Advanced Settings are global variables that remain set for a given installation of Oasis montaj. The Advanced Settings file (geosettings.meta) stores the values, which remain the same for different data sets and Oasis montaj projects. Oasis montaj Advanced Settings contains parameter settings that are used to establish default settings in Oasis montaj. When Oasis montaj is first started, it will read the contents of the Advanced Settings file and set default values. Changing the Advanced Settings file after montaj has started will not change defaults in the running program.
Oasis montaj 37
The Advanced Settings file, located on the GX|Global Settings|Advanced menu, are displayed in the Metadata Tool and organised in sections. Each section will have associated parameters that can be modified to user specifications.
The General Settings (SETTINGS GX) can be used to maintain the most common parts of the Oasis montaj global settings.
Tutorial 1: Getting Ready to Work 39
Tutorial 1: Getting Ready to Work In this tutorial, we will guide you through the basic steps to start working with your new software. At this point you should have already installed Oasis montaj. You should begin by starting the Oasis montaj softare application. T O S TART U SING O ASIS
MONTAJ
1. On the Start menu bar click Programs and then click Geosoft and then click Oasis
montaj/Oasis montaj .
or 2. Double click on the Geosoft icon in Windows Explorer or File manager or the
icon located on you desktop screen.
Welcome to the Oasis montaj Environment When you start Oasis montaj, the system opens to a Graphical User Interface (GUI) with standard Windows style elements, including the Main Menu, Pop-up Menus and Online Help as shown below:
40 Tutorial 1: Getting Ready to Work
System Files As you work with the system, you will become familiar with a variety of standard files used for specific functions. The following list provides a short summary of the more important files. Oasis montaj System Files
System File Extensions
Geosoft database file
*.GDB
Map file, including plots and grids
*.MAP
Geosoft grid file
*.GRD
Colour information for grids/images
*.AGG
ArcGIS MXD file
*.MXD
Oasis montaj XML file
*.XML
Geosoft eXecutable
*.GX
Geosoft script file
*.GS
Oasis menu, Oasis sub-menu
*.OMN, * .SMN
Geosoft project file
*.GPF
Geosoft projection information file
*.GI
Geosoft map file (used in the MapInfo software to distinguish a Geosoft map file from a MapInfo (*.map) file
*.GM
Creating a Working Directory The system enables you to access files anywhere but it is a good strategy to carefully organize your data (project information and files) before carrying out any processing. To start this tutorial, please create a working directory called D:\Tutorial. A general rule to follow in working with Geosoft applications is to avoid working in the Geosoft directory. In these tutorials, we will follow this rule by keeping all the working data files in D:\Tutorial. Copying Tutorial Files to Your Working Directory This tutorial is based on the following data and image files: casaber.xyz geochem.xyz mag.leg map04.con map.prj mag.agg indexmap.jpg
krigsample.csv krigsample.xyz head.xyz magvlf.xyz sqltest.mdb test.grd projtest.xyz
mag.xyz survey.leg map04mag.grd map04.mdf mag.grd omontaj.tif
Tutorial 1: Getting Ready to Work 41
Before you Begin This tutorial uses sample data provided on the Oasis montaj CD-ROM (or can be downloaded with the tutorial from the Geosoft web site). These data are located in the \Geosoft\Oasis montaj\data\various directory. Before you begin the tutorial, copy the data files from the various directory to a working directory such as D:\Tutorial.
Creating a Project To work in Oasis montaj requires an open Project. An Oasis montaj "Project" encompasses every item in your working project; from the data files in your project (databases, maps, and grids), to the tools used (including auxiliary tools such as histograms, scatter plots etc.), to the project setup including the menus you have displayed and whether you are working on a map or profile and the state in which you left it the last time you used it. The project also controls your working directory. Projects are saved as (*.gpf) files. If you open an existing project from a directory, the system assumes that all your project files are located in the same directory. To streamline your work, as well as keep it organized, you may wish to make sure that your project file is in the same directory as the other files you want to use. We recommend that each project you work on have its own project (*.gpf) file. If you use a number of applications or addon tools in Oasis montaj that have different menus, you can use the project to display only the menus you require. The Project Explorer tool enables you to browse as well as open any project item. The Project Explorer has two windows, the Data window that includes all data files included in the project and the Tools window that organizes and maintains the project tools. To access the Tools window click the Tools bar on the bottom of the Project Explorer. To return to the Data window, click the Data bar on the top the Project Explorer. T O C REATE
A
P ROJECT :
1. Start Oasis montaj. 2. On the File menu, click Project and then click New. The New Project dialog is
displayed.
42 Tutorial 1: Getting Ready to Work
Oasis montaj assumes that your data is in the directory containing this project 3. Specify a name and directory for the project. For example, name the project GeoDemo and specify the working directory as D:\Tutorial Note:
4. Click the [Save] button. The system saves the project and indicates it is open by
adding menus to the menu bar, adding buttons to the Standard Short-cut bar and by displaying the Project Explorer window. These are visual clues indicating that you are ready to start working with the system.
Tutorial 1: Getting Ready to Work 43
5. To close a project, click File|Project and then click Close.
Loading Application and Tool Menus The Oasis montaj Mapping and Processing System menus are displayed directly under the Title Bar when you open a project. These dropdown menus provide direct access to all of the systems capabilities. Oasis montaj has reorganized its menus to streamline workflows and improve your productivity. The new menus provide a logical placement of tools, with new, consistent naming and the removal of duplicate menu items. The specialized applications or add-on tools (i.e. geophysical and geochemical analysis, 3D drillhole plotting, gravity and magnetic filtering, leveling, interpretation etc.) have their own menu files (for example, magmap.omn) that will include all of the menus and submenus that you will need to use the additional software. Manuals and tutorials for these applications and add-on tools can be opened from the Help|Manuals and Tutorials menu or downloaded from the Geosoft website, http://www.geosoft.com/resources/tutorials/. Your Oasis montaj project keeps track of which menus are displayed. This means that you can have a different set of menus displayed for each project. This is especially useful if you are working on multiple projects and using many applications or tools. For example, if you are working on a geochemistry project, you may want to display different menus than if you are working on an UXO project. By creating separate projects with differing menus you can customise the Oasis montaj environment to suit your current project.
44 Tutorial 1: Getting Ready to Work T O L OAD
AN
A PPLICATION
OR
A DD - ON
TOOL
M ENU :
1. On the GX menu, click Load Menu (or click the Load menu icon
on the Standard Shortcut Toolbar). The Load menu dialog will be displayed.
2. Select the menu file (*.omn) from the list of files and click the [Open] button.
The system displays the new menu on your menu bar. If you want to modify your default menus (i.e. load a specified menu with every new project) you can use the GX|Global Settings|General menu to display the Default settings dialog to change your settings. If you are really interested in system configurations and want to view all of the System settings open the Advanced Settings file (GX|Global Settings|Advanced). The Advanced Settings will be displayed in the Metadata Browser.
Note:
Finding FAST Answers to Questions Oasis montaj provides information through two different interfaces; the Online Help system and the Manuals, Tutorials and Technical Notes. You can use the Online Help, which can be accessed by clicking the Help ( ) button on the individual dialogs or by selecting the Help|Help Topics menu, can be used to locate quick information using the Contents ( ), Search ( ) and Favorites ( ) tabs. The Manuals, Tutorials, and Technical Notes system, accessed through Help|Manuals and Tutorials, contains full-length PDF documents that you can print. Geosoft’s electronic information approach is called FAST. The following table summarizes FAST, how to use it and the types of information and assistance you can expect to find. ?
Type
How to Find It
Information Available
F
Fastest Information
Move the cursor to any part of the Interface or menu item and press the
key.
Instant information on the GUI or corresponding Geosoft eXecutable (GX).
A
Application Information
Click the Help ( any dialog (GX).
S
System Information
On the Help menu, select Help Topics to run the Help System. Search the Contents or use the Search Function.
Oasis montaj conceptual, procedural and GX information.
T
Tutorials
On the Help menu, select Manuals and Tutorials.
Oasis montaj Quick Start tutorial and applications and add-on tools manuals, tutorials and selected technical notes are available for online viewing and printing in Adobe PDF format.
) button on
To access technical information for each parameter on the current Oasis montaj dialog (GX).
Tutorial 1: Getting Ready to Work 45
The following graphic gives you a preview of the “S” part of FAST. When you access the main Help system, you see a screen similar to the following:
Advantages of FAST Information Delivery Geosoft’s move from printed manuals to electronic information delivery is pragmatic: • The system has become so full-featured that the optimal solution to providing accurate, brief and complete (ABC) information was to centralize information in a single information warehouse (i.e. the Oasis montaj Help System). • Users would be able to print full versions of manuals based on the design and technologies Geosoft was implementing. • Electronic information retrieval is a powerful technique that enables users to take advantage of the computer’s highly optimized searching capabilities. • With over 40 manuals to support, manuals were updated infrequently; the new system means that information can be updated and delivered much more rapidly through media such as our web site. • Users would have the ability to print partial information or full manuals wherever they were – providing maximum flexibility, reducing the need to keep track of manuals and putting the information at the user’s fingertips. • Deploy resources more effectively as measured in terms of our users’ ultimate benefit. By transferring resources spent in low-return tasks (such as formatting, producing and distributing manuals) into creating and maintaining
46 Tutorial 1: Getting Ready to Work
information, Geosoft has committed itself to spending its resources to deliver accurate, brief and complete information to its customers.
Printing Complete Manuals on Demand To make sure our users have the latest manuals, we ship electronic versions of selected manuals and tutorials with our Help system. Application manuals and Quick Start™ Tutorials currently available include: • montaj Geophysics (includes 1D-FFT Filtering) • montaj Geochemistry • montaj Drillhole Plotting • montaj Airborne Quality Control • montaj Geophysics Levelling • montaj MAGMAP Filtering (includes 2D-FFT Filtering) • montaj Gravity & Magnetic Interpretation (includes Euler 3D) • montaj Gridknit • montaj Induced Polarization • montaj 256-Channel Radiometrics Processing • montaj Gravity and Terrain Correction • montaj UX-Detect • Target Surface and Drillhole Mapping System • GX Developer • DAP Server • DAP Cataloguing Metadata In addition, as part of our new FAST strategy, we are allocating resources formerly spent on formatting, preparing and delivering hardcopy manuals on adding more manuals and tutorials to the system and updating the current ones on a timely basis. For the most up-to-date manuals and tutorials visit Geosoft website at http://www.geosoft.com/resources/tutorials/ T O P RINT C OMPLETE M ANUALS 1. On the Help menu, click Manuals and Tutorials. The system displays “The
Online Manuals, Tutorials, and Technical Notes” menu page in your default HTML browser. 2. Click on the document you want to print. The system opens the PDF file for
printing. Note: If the tutorial is not available locally you will be linked to the Geosoft “Downloads” web page. Download the tutorial of interest from this page. 3. Once the PDF tutorial is opened in your default Reader, click the File|Print menu to print the PDF file.
Tutorial 2: Working with Data 47
Tutorial 2: Working with Data Some of the more important components of the system are databases, spreadsheets and profiles. The “window” to the database in Oasis montaj is a specialized earth science spreadsheet that appears automatically when you create a new database. This spreadsheet provides access to a wide variety of data management, data and profile viewing and processing capabilities. The purpose of this tutorial is to give you a general overview of how you can use this data management system effectively in your applications.
Database Menus There are two main database menus, Database and Database Tools, as shown below: Database menu
Database Tools menu
Creating an Oasis montaj Database One of the fundamental technologies in Oasis montaj is its unique database architecture. This architecture is designed to let you rapidly create and import data of many kinds (ASCII and binary) into high-performance Oasis montaj databases. After data is imported into a database, you have numerous options for editing, visualizing, processing and performing other tasks. Oasis montaj features a database compression option that enables you to reduce the file size and improve the performance of Geosoft database files (*.gdb). Processing
48 Tutorial 2: Working with Data
speed is improved by compressing files because the computer takes less time to read and write to disk. Power users will especially benefit from using compressed databases. You can choose either to compress for speed, compress for size or no compression at all. Which type of compression you use is entirely up to you. It all depends on which type better suites your needs. For example, you would more than likely compress for speed if you have a lot of hard drive space available. However, if space is limited, you may wish to compress for size. T O C REATE
A
N EW D ATABASE :
1. On the Database menu, select New Database. The Create New Database dialog is
displayed. 2. Specify a New database name (tfmag.gdb). You can then specify the Maximum
lines/groups and Maximum channels/fields. The defaults are 200 and 50, which is fine for the purposes of this tutorial, but generally we recommend that you specify a number that is representative of the final estimated project size. This strategy ensures that you have enough space available in your project while not consuming excessive storage space. The size can be changed later via the Maintenance…menu option from the Data menu, should your project expand in scope. 3. Specify Compress for SPEED in the Compression box and select the Advanced
tab. 4. This dialog enables you to change the way Oasis montaj works with data in the
database file. These parameters control the database "page size", which is the smallest unit of memory that is read/written and stored on the database. In almost all cases, the default page size (1024 bytes) should be sufficient since this will support a total database size of up to 4 Terabytes in size and will enable individual channels on a line to hold up to 64 Megabytes of data. This is sufficient for our database, for more information click theHelp (
) button.
5. Click the [OK] button. The system creates a new database with the database name
that you specified and opens a Spreadsheet window with empty Channel Header Cells and Data cells.
Tutorial 2: Working with Data 49
Database Lines/Groups Geosoft databases are organized in lines, channels and elements. The database stores all data “elements” of a particular type in individual “channels” (or columns). Database “lines” are a collection of related “channels”.
Each database “line” has a line number, version number, line type, flight number (only required for airborne data), survey date and selection status.
50 Tutorial 2: Working with Data
A “group” is a special kind of line. It also stores data in channels, but instead of using a name based on line number, version number, line type and flight number, it can be named using any alpha-numeric string (with some exceptions).
Each database “group” line has an optional “CLASS” name. Like a regular line, it has a selection status.
While all the channels in a database are accessible inside a regular line, a group line can restrict the available, displayable channels to a smaller subset, excluding those not relevant to the group’s data. A database may contain any number of lines and/or groups. If your survey data has not been collected on a line basis (i.e. is random), or cannot be organized
Tutorial 2: Working with Data 51
conveniently into groups that can be thought of as lines (such as drillhole or UXO target data), you can store all data in a single "line". Note: An additional benefit of the Geosoft database structure is that since columns are stored separately, this file format is capable of storing and manipulating data with different end point and sample intervals. Creating a New Line or Group Creating a new Line (or Group) is made easy with the the Database popup menu. 1. On the current database, select the Line (or Group) header cell, right-click and
from the popup menu, select New Line (or New Group). 2. The Create Line (or Create Group) dialog will be displayed. Enter the parameters
as required and click the [OK] button. 3. The new “Line” (or Group) will be created in your current database.
52 Tutorial 2: Working with Data
Oasis montaj Supported Data Formats Oasis montaj provides seamless access to both original spatial data and processed information (grids, images and vector plots). Spatial data import formats include
Processed data import formats include
• AMIRA format files
• ArcView shape files (SHP)
• ASCII data files, CSV
• AutoCAD DXF (DXF)
• ASEG GDF files
• DATAMINE (DM)
• Blocked binary data files
• Geosoft plot (PLT)
• Database table files (single or all tables)
• Geosoft map files (MAP)
• Excel Spreadsheets
• Grid and image formats
• Flat archive data files
• MapInfo TAB files
• Geosoft binary data files
• Maxwell Plate files
• Geosoft XYZ data files
• Microstation DGN files
• ODBC data files
• Surpac (STR, DTM)
• Picodas PDAS data files
• GoCad (VO)
• RMS data files
• UBC (MOD, MSH, DEN, SUS)
• USGS data files
• LAS files (LAS)
Common Grid Formats (GRD) including
Common image formats (IMG) including
• DEM formats (GLOBE, ETOPO5, USGS)
• EOSAT MSS (Old 4 Band BIL)
• EOSAT Fast Format
• ER Mapper algorithm (ALG)
• ER Mapper grid (ERS)
• ER Mapper compressed (ECW)
• ESRI Binary Raster (FLT)
• GeoTIFF Image (TIF)
• Landmark ZMAP (DAT)
• GIF (GIF)
• Geopack (GRD)
• IMG Image (IMG)
• Geosoft grid files (GRD)
• JPEG 2000 (J2K and JP2)
• Geosoft Hypergrid (HGD)
• JPEG File Interchange Format (JPG)
• Grid eXchange Format (GXF)
• Landsat MSS (4 band BSQ) and Landsat TM
• Surfer grid file (GRD) • Texaco Startrax (GRD) • USGS (DDF, DEM) • World Geoscience (H)
• PCIDSK Format (GIX) • Portable Network Graphics Format (PNG) • Tagged Image File Format (TIFF) • Targa Image (TGA) • Uncompressed PC Paintbrush (PCX) • Windows Bitmap (BMP)
Tutorial 2: Working with Data 53
Importing Data into the Oasis montaj Database There are a number of options for importing Geosoft and third-party formatted data. In this tutorial, you will import and work with standard Geosoft XYZ files, default templates and import modes. For more information about how templates and import modes work refer to the Help system. T O I MPORT D ATA INTO A D ATABASE 1. On the Database menu, select Import and then click Geosoft XYZ. 2. The system displays the Import dialog asking if you want to “Import data into the
current database?” Select (Yes) to import the data into our previously created “tfmag.gdb” database and the Import XYZ data dialog will be displayed.
3. In the XYZ data file box, specify mag.xyz. You can click on the [Browse] button
to search for this file in your Tutorial directory. Note:
The [Browse] buttons enable you to locate and select files from anywhere on your computer or network drives. This assists in ensuring the selection of the proper files from the correct directory are chosen.
4. Click the [Template] button. The system displays the Import dialog box with the
name of the file you are importing displayed along the dialog box title bar.
54 Tutorial 2: Working with Data
5. The name of the default import template file “default.i0” is displayed in the
Template Name box. This file will include the settings specified in this dialog. If you have multiple files of the same format to import you can rename this file to be used again (e.g. ImportTFMag. i0). 6. To modify the settings for a channel, select (highlight) the channel you wish to
edit and Source Data and Output boxes to the right, specify your changes. 7. In the Source Data box you can select a Format for your numbered data. (i.e.
normal, scientific, data, time) from the drop down menu. If your data contains a value (for example –9999) that represents dummy values, enter this value in the Dummy parameter box. 8. In the Output Channel box you can select or specify a Name you want to use for
the channel in the database. You can also select the Type of numbers to use, the Width (number of digits), and number of Decimal places. 9. When you are done editing and modifying your data click the [OK] button to
return to the Import XYZ data dialog box.
Tutorial 2: Working with Data 55
10. Click the [OK] button to import the data. 11. The imported data should look like the picture below.
Note:
The default placeholder for missing or blank data (i.e. dummy value) in an XYZ file is “*”. If the dummy value was for example, -9999, then you should enter this in the Dummy box on the template dialog box..
Drag-n-Drop XYZ Data The ability to drag XYZ files and drop them into an open database file (*.GDB) is now included in Oasis montaj. Only default parameters are used and XYZ files must be in the correct format and the database must be large enough to hold the dropped XYZ file. The ability to drag other file types directly from Windows Explorer and drop them into Oasis montaj for display is also available including; grid files (*.GRD), map files (*.MAP) and database files (*.GDB) files. Items on the Project Explorer bar may also be dragged and dropped.
Displaying Data in the Spreadsheet Unlike traditional spreadsheets, the Oasis montaj Spreadsheet windows provide a view of your database instead of the actual data in the database. This design enables
56 Tutorial 2: Working with Data
you to customize the spreadsheet to display data to your specifications. In addition, it lets you work with data in the spreadsheet without actually making changes to the data — until you decide to save the database. After you save the database, your changes are permanent. For more information about our databases, please refer to the Help system. When you import data you will notice that the system automatically displays all of your data in the Spreadsheet window. Note: When the system creates a database, it automatically creates L0:0. During the data import process, if the data that you import does not contain a line 0, so that there is no data in this line, the line is automatically deleted. If the line contains data it is retained. T O R EMOVE
A
C HANNEL (C OLUMN ):
1. Click once on the channel header cell labelled mag to select it. Press the [space
bar] key on the keyboard or click on the right mouse button and select Remove column from the popup menu. The channel is removed from the Spreadsheet view. Note: The database (*.gdb) file still contains all the data. The Spreadsheet is only used to provide a view of selected channels. T O L IST A C HANNEL : 1. Move your cursor to the top of the first empty channel header cell, right click and
from the popup menu, select List.
2. A box will appear beneath the empty channel header listing all the available
channels that currently are not being viewed in the Spreadsheet window. Select mag to display the channel in the Spreadsheet.
Tutorial 2: Working with Data 57
3. If you know the name of the data channel already, you can simply position the
cursor on a specific Channel Header Cell, type the name and click the [Enter] button. Note: If you see ‘**’, this convention indicates that the data are too wide for the spreadsheet column. To change the width of a column, place the cursor on the dividing line between the column headers. The mouse becomes a double arrow. Click on the left mouse button and drag the line to the right to increase the column width. Release the mouse button when done.
Channel Header Cells The cells immediately right of the ID Cell are called Channel Header Cells. These cells are used to identify a unique type of data contained in a column of the spreadsheet. The data for a channel appears below the channel header. The channel headers provide a visual indication of the current status of the displayed channel. If the top left corner of the header cell is marked by a black triangle, the channel is read-only, and it may not be modified. A red line at the bottom of the header cell indicates that the channel has been re-sampled in order to present a view of the data with one of the other channels on the screen.
58 Tutorial 2: Working with Data
Current X and Y (and Z) Channels Oasis montaj supports "current" X and Y (and Z) channels. This capability enables users to select the channels that they would like to use as the current X and Y (and Z) channels (for example, East, North, and Relative Level). To set the current X and Y (and Z) channels, using the Coordinates|Change X, Y coordinates menu item, select the names of the new coordinate channels. This makes these channels the new current X and Y channels. You can also use this menu item to review the current settings for the X and Y channels. Markers have been added to the channel header to indicate which channels are currently defined to be the "current" X, Y (and Z) channels. The markers are little rectangles on the right side of the header cell, and contain "x", "y" (or "z") in reversed display (like the triangle protection symbol on the left). When you alter the current coordinate channels (Coordinates|Change X,Y coordinates), these markers change too. Normally, users will just get "x" and "y", but if you have a "Z" channel it will get the "z". The "z" will be used in Wholeplot databases, where DH_EAST = "x", DH_NORTH = "y" and DH_RL = "z".
Processing Data in the Spreadsheet After you open a Spreadsheet and display one or more channels, you have the option of processing the data using the Oasis montaj database tools. These tools help you apply formulas and perform database operations between channels for individual groups of points, lines or the entire database. For more information about the processing tools, please refer to the Online Help system. T O C ALCULATE B ASIC S TATISTICS
ON A
C HANNEL :
1. Click three times on the channel header cell labelled mag to highlight the mag
data in all of the selected lines (groups) in the database. The selected data is the data the system will calculate the statistics on. Note: Clicking (highlighting) the channel header once selects the header cell, clicking twice selects the channel and clicking three times selects the channel in all of the selected lines (groups) in the database. 2. On the Database Tools menu, select Report and then select Mark Statistics. The Stat Report dialog is displayed.
Tutorial 2: Working with Data 59
3. You can save a copy of the statistical report by clicking the [Save Stats] button.
The system will display the Save Stats dialog box where you can specify a name for the New statistics file then click the [OK] button to have the system save the file to your project directory.
4. On the Stat Report dialog box click the [OK] button to close the dialog box.
The following list summarizes how to obtain results on specific parts of your database: Click once on the channel header cell to highlight the header cell.
No statistics can be calculated.
Click twice (double click) on the channel header cell to highlight the data in the current line (group).
Statistics are calculated for that specific line of the database.
Click three times on the channel header cell to highlight the data in all of the selected lines (groups) in the database.
Channel statistics are calculated for all of the selected lines in the database.
Note:
The maximum value in the mag channel is 9999 - for this dataset, this number may indicate a data spike or spikes in some or all of the lines of data.
60 Tutorial 2: Working with Data
Displaying a Profile in the Spreadsheet After you open a Spreadsheet and display one or more channels, you have the option of displaying them in graphical (profile) form in a Profile window. The Profile window is composed of sub-windows called panes. You can display up to five separate panes with 32 channels of data in each pane. For more information about the Profile window, please refer to the Online Help system. T O D ISPLAY
A
P ROFILE :
1. Select (highlight) the channel header cell of the channel you wish to view in
profile format, for example, the mag channel. Right-click and from the database popup menu, select Show Profile. . The profile of the channel data is displayed in the Profile Window immediately below the spreadsheet.
Note:
To see where the mag values are located with regards to the profile line, simply select a value (or a range of values) in the mag channel and the system will highlight the corresponding area on the profile (or visa versa).
2. We recommend you experiment with the various options available for profile
display, appearance, scaling and plotting etc. available via the Profile popup menu, available by right-clicking while holding the cursor over the profile window. T O D ISPLAY
THE
P ROFILE
OF
D IFFERENT L INE :
1. Move the cursor to the Line Header Cell in the top left corner of the spreadsheet.
The currently displayed line in the worksheet is L5:0. 2. Select (hightlight) the Line Header Cell, click the right mouse button and select
List from the popup menu. A list of all the line numbers in the current database
Tutorial 2: Working with Data 61
will be displayed. You can think of each line number as a worksheet in the spreadsheet window. When you view a new line number a new worksheet is opened in the spreadsheet window with corresponding line number information.
3. Click on L13:0 from the list and you will see that the spreadsheet and profile
window now displays L13:0, as shown below:
4. The profile view now shows the two data spikes, which peak at a value of 9999.
These spikes were also identified in the channel statistics and should be removed from the data before performing any additional data processing. Note:
When the Line Header Cell is highlighted, you can use the [Page Up] and [Page Down] keys from your keyboard to scroll through lines. You can also use the Database Tools Bar to scroll th rough the lines. The figure below shows what each of these buttons do.
Database Toolbar Display First Line/Group. Click this button to show the data and profiles for the starting line in your database. Display Last Line/Group. Click this button to show the data and profiles for the final line in your database.
62 Tutorial 2: Working with Data
Display Previous Line/Group. Click this button to show the data and profiles for the previous line in your database. Display Next Line/Group. Click this button to show the data and profiles for the following line in your database. Create a New Database Line/Group. Click this button to create a new line in your database. A dialg box is displayed that enables you to specify the line number, version, date, and type. If your database contains groups of data instead of lines, a new group will be created. Delete Selected Database Line/Group. Click this button to delete the currently select line from your database.
Protect and Unprotect Channels in a Spreadsheet You will notice that each channel header has a black triangle in its upper left-hand corner. This indicates that the channel is Protected and cannot be edited by the user until the “Protection” is turned off. Original imported data are automatically stored as protected data. T O R EMOVE /A DD C HANNEL P ROTECTION 1. Select (highlight) the channel header cell you want to remove the protection from,
right-click and from the popup menu, deselect (uncheck) Protected. 2. The system removes the black triangle from the top left corner of the channel
header cell, indicating the channel is no longer protected. Note:
Using the database popup menu you can also select to Protect All or Protect None of the database channels. Check the Protect All option to protect all of the channels in your database and Protect None to remove the protection from all of the channels.
3. To protect the channel, select the header cell, right-click and from the popup
menu, select (check) Protected. The black triangle is returned to the top left corner of the channel header cell, indicating that the channel is protected.
Creating Working Channels in the Oasis montaj Database You can create new channels in your database to store the results of filters, mathematical expressions, or any other processing operations. We recommend that you create a new channel for storing any changes you make to the original imported data. In this tutorial we need to create a new channel into which we can copy the original mag channel to for editing purposes. T O C REATE
A
N EW C HANNEL :
1. Move to the top of the next empty column and highlight the channel header cell
using a single click of your left mouse button.
Tutorial 2: Working with Data 63 2. Type in the name of the new channel (magedited) and press the [Enter] key on
your keyboard. The system displays the Create Channel dialog box. Note that, you can also select the channel hearder cell, left click and from the popup menu select New, to display the Create Channel dialog.
3. Click the [OK] button to accept the default values. The system creates a new
channel in the database named magedited and fills this channel with dummy values (i.e. *). 4. On the Database Tools menu, select Channel Tools|Copy channel. The Copy a
channel dialog is displayed.
5. Select mag from the dropdown list for the Copy FROM box and magedited from
the dropdown list for the TO box. Click the [OK] button. 6. The system copies values from the mag channel into the newly created
magedited channel.
64 Tutorial 2: Working with Data T O C REATE A N EW C HANNEL U SING (O PTIONAL ):
THE
M ATH F ORMULA T OOL - A LTERNATE M ETHOD
Follow steps 1 through 3 above; however use a different channel name such as magedited2. 1. Click left mouse button three times on the magedited2 channel header cell to
highlight all of the data within this channel. 2. Press the [=] key from your keyboard to activate the Math Formula Tool. You can
see the Math Formula Tool is activated by looking at the status bar of the spreadsheet window. 3. Type mag in the formula bar. Typing mag means the new channel will be equal
to the mag channel. Notice that as you type the formula, it is written in each channel cell as well as at the bottom of the screen.
4. Press the [Enter] key on your keyboard to activate the formula and have the
system display the values in the selected channel. Note: The math formula tool supports simple math and algebraic functions as well as temporary variables for complex expressions using the channel names as variables. For more information, see the Help system. We will use this math tool later in the tutorial. T O D ELETE
A
C HANNEL
FROM THE
D ATABASE :
We do not require two magedited channels; therefore we can easily delete the magedited2 channel from the database. 1. Before you can delete a channel from the spreadsheet window you need to make
sure the channel is not protected (i.e. there is no black triangle in the upper left corner of the channel header cell). If you try and delete a channel that is protected the system will not allow you to proceed with the deletion process. 2. Right mouse click on the magedited2 channel header cell and select Delete
channel from the popup menu.
Tutorial 2: Working with Data 65
3. The system will display the Delete dialog box. This dialog box is a safety feature
confirming that you really wish to delete a channel from the database.
4. Click the [Yes] button to permanently delete this channel from your database
(Note that, the default is No this is a secondary safety feature preventing you from pressing the Enter key by mistake, deleting the channel). Note: It is important to realize that deleting a channel is very different than just hiding a channel from spreadsheet view. When you hide a channel from the spreadsheet it is still there in the database and can be retrieved simply by listing the channel again. When you delete a channel it is not only removed from the spreadsheet view, but it is also deleted from the database as well.
Editing a Channel in the Database Once you have made a copy of the channel you can now edit and process the data found in that channel. In this case we wish to remove the two data spikes found on line 13:0 of the tfmag.gdb database.
66 Tutorial 2: Working with Data T O E DIT D ATA IN
A
C HANNEL U SING
THE
P ROFILE V IEW :
1. Before you can edit a channel you must make sure that channel is not protected.
Then, ensure that you are viewing the correct line 13 (L13:0) in the worksheet, and that you have chosen the magedited channel to edit. 2. With the magedited channel selected, right-click and from the poup menu, select
Show Profile. The system displays a profile of the data in the profile window below the spreadsheet. 3. Move to the profile window and click on the first data spike (there are two on the
line). You will notice that the corresponding data value to that spike, 9999, is highlighted in the spreadsheet view at sample (fiducial) 32 and a small box is drawn at the top of the data spike in the profile window. Clicking anywhere in the profile view will display the corresponding value in the spreadsheet view.
4. Click with your mouse on the 9999 value in the corresponding magedited
channel. Press the [Delete] key from the keyboard to remove the value from the database. A dummy value (*) will appear. 5. Repeat the procedure for the other data spike found at fiducial 131 and a second
dummy value (*) will appear. Your profile should now look like the one shown below.
Tutorial 2: Working with Data 67
Editing Data Using Conditional Expressions Spikes may also be removed from a dataset by using a conditional math expression. Select the magedited channel and press “=”, then using the Math Formula Tool, type the following formula:
This formula states that if the mag value is less than 9000, magedited will equal the mag value; otherwise it is set to the dummy value. This procedure works in this case because the bad data spikes are outside of the valid data range.
Using the Channel Math Expression Tool The ability to create, save, load and execute math expressions in Oasis montaj has never been easier. Three new standardized Math Expression Builder tools have been added, each of these tools provides all of the math expression keywords on a single tabbed dialog, for each data type. These easy-to-use tools enable you to build mathematical expressions for Channels (1D data), Grids (2D data), and Voxels (3D data).
68 Tutorial 2: Working with Data
The Math Expression Builder uses normal algebraic notation that is a combination of keywords, such as functions and operators that calculate values or change the values of variables (i.e. Channels, Grids or Voxel data). TO
ACCESS THE
C HANNEL M ATH E XPRESSION B UILDER
1. On the Database Tools menu, select Channel Math. The Channel Math
Expression Builder is displayed.
Tutorial 2: Working with Data 69
2. To display the available Operators and Functions click the [Operators] button
and all of the Operators and Functions that are available to help you build your math expression will be displayed. 3. For detailed information on the Math Expression Builder Components and how to
apply them, see the Help topic, Math Expression Builder (Help|Help Topics).
Interpolating Data Now that you have removed the spikes and examined the database for other possible errors, you may wish to interpolate the data through the gaps created when you removed the data spikes. T O F ILL G APS
IN A
D ATA C HANNEL U SING I NTERPOLATION :
1. On the Database Tools menu, select Channel Tools|Interpolate. The Interpolate
Dummies dialog is displayed.
70 Tutorial 2: Working with Data
2. Select magedited as the Channel to interpolate and also select magedited as the
Output interpolated channel. Select Minimum Curvature as the Interpolation method. Click the [OK] button. 3. The system will interpolate the gaps created in the data during the editing session
using the minimum curvature method of interpolation. Click the Help ( for more information on this function.
) button
4. Display the mag and magedited channels in the profile window by right clicking
on each channels header cell and selecting Show profile from the popup menu. You can now compare the edited data against the raw data.
Note:
By displaying the two profiles in the same profile window you can examine the effectiveness of interactive editing and interpolation on the original data. However, note that the profiles have different vertical scales magedited is (4720.90 – 5974.10) and mag is (4639.92 – 10104.08).
Tutorial 2: Working with Data 71
Profile - Y Axis Options The Y Axis Options enables you to set scale options for the Y axis of the profiles in the profile window. TO
DISPLAY THE TWO PROFILES AT THE SAME SCALE :
1. In the Profile window, right-click and from the popup menu, select Y Axis
Options.The Panel Options dialog will be displayed.
2. Select the Scale to fit for each line radio button option and then select (check) the
Same scale for all profiles in panel option. 3. Click the [OK] button to display the two profiles at the same scale.
The following list summarizes the different scale options available to you: Scale to fit for each line
Adjusts the scale in the profile box to fit each line that is displayed.
72 Tutorial 2: Working with Data
Fix the range
Uses the same range for all the profiles that are displayed.
Fix the scale, centre the range
Fixes the ranges and displays the line in the centre of the window.
Same scale for all profiles in panel
All profiles (including those from different channels) are set to the same scale.
Same range for all profiles in panel
All profiles are centred individually on their own mid-data value.
Profile – X Axis options The X Axis Options enables dialog enables you to select the channel to use as the Xaxis and automatically rescale the X-axis as well as display Vertical grid lines. T O S ELECT X A XIS C AHNNEL : 1. In the Profile window, right-click and from the popup menu, select X Axis
Options.The All-Panel Options dialog is displayed.
2. Use this dialog to select the X-Axis to use in the profile window, to select to auto
rescale the X-Axis, to display vertical grid line and at what interval? 3. Click the [OK] button to continue and your profile will be updated.
Profile Options Use the tabbed Profile dialog to specify the options for the current profile. This dialog includes five tabs; Data Info, Line Styles, Colours, Symbols, and Grid. For more information on the Profile dialog and the individual tabs, click the [Help] button on the tab of interest.
Tutorial 2: Working with Data 73
Master Sample The Master Sample channel is used to force all other database channels to be sampled at the same fiducial rate as the selected channel. The Master Sample channel is identified by blue line under the channel header. This feature is useful when you want to edit data from a channel that has a larger fiducial rate (data sampled less often) then other channels in the database. By default, the spreadsheet window displays data using the channel with the smallest fiducial (most frequent sampling) rate. For example, consider a database with two channels. Channel 1 has a fiducial sampling rate of 10 readings/second. This channel is considered to be smaller (more frequent) than Channel 2, which was sampled at 1 reading/second. By making Channel 2 the Master Sample channel, Channel 1 is displayed at the same rate so that only every tenth fiducial is displayed. T O A CTIVATE
THE
M ASTER S AMPLE :
1. Right click on a database channel header and select "Master Sample" from the
popup menu. 2. A blue line will be displayed under the channel header. TO
REMOVE THE
M ASTER S AMPLE :
1. Right click on a database channel header and select "No Master Sample" from the
popup menu. 2. The blue line will be removed from under the channel header.
74 Tutorial 2: Working with Data
Saving Changes to Databases When you are ready, you may want to make your changes permanent in the database. T O S AVE C HANGES
TO
Y OUR D ATABASE :
1. On the Database menu, select Save Database Changes. 2. The system displays the Save Changes dialog box. Click the [Yes] button to
confirm the save.
3. The system updates your database and the changes are now permanent. Note:
To undo changes, click the Discard Database Changes menu option from the Database menu. This will restore your database to its last saved state.
Tutorial 3: Importing and Exporting Databases 75
Tutorial 3: Importing and Exporting Databases Oasis montaj provides a variety of importing and exporting capabilities, including: • Reading directly from common databases (Access, FoxPro, Dbase, Paradox and OBDC) • Importing ASCII data interactively via Excel-style import wizard • Exporting your data as Microsoft Access database format (*.mdb) • Exporting ASCII data The following menus show you the importing and exporting options available to you in the system. Database|Import menu
Database|Export menu
Before You Begin this Tutorial: Oasis montaj uses ADO and ODBC software developed by Microsoft to connect to other spreadsheet and database applications. In this tutorial, we will guide you through these tasks. The tutorial is structured using the following steps:
76 Tutorial 3: Importing and Exporting Databases
• • • •
First we will export some data from an Oasis montaj database to a Microsoft Access database to familiarize you with the exporting process. We will then proceed to import the Access database into a new Oasis montaj database to familiarize you with the import process. You will then create your own ASCII data set by exporting from Oasis montaj. Lastly you will import this Ascii data back into a new Oasis montaj database.
Getting Ready to Export to a Microsoft Access This tutorial will use the tfmag.gdb database file. This data file contains x and y ground locations as well as data (mag) values. Although the data is magnetic data, it is suitable for demonstrating the standard manipulations you will perform with any type of data with which you are working. Data is arranged in lines (i.e. multiple worksheets) which is not typical for certain types of data (i.e. random geochemical data) but again, you should be able to generalize this to the case in which you have only one line (i.e. random data). Database
Exporting to Microsoft Access Database Format Before working with the database export capabilities, please be aware that Geosoft currently supports table export only to Microsoft Access databases. Typically this should not hinder you in practice since Access is widely supported by other database applications. However, we apologize for any inconvenience this limitation may cause. If you have any questions or concerns, please do not hesitate to contact any of our Technical Support groups around the world. The system offers you several choices for creating an Access database, namely exporting to: Individual tables
Each line (or group in the case of drillhole data) has its own table in the output database.
Single table
All lines are stored in one table in the output database.
As a rule of thumb, if you are working with multiple lines, we recommend that you export lines as Individual tables so that you can keep track of them in future. If you are working with a single line (i.e. geochemical data), it is more likely that you will export the line as a Single table. In the following procedure, we will export data as Individual tables within a database. T O E XPORT
TO A
M ICROSOFT A CCESS D ATABASE :
1. Make sure the tfmag.gdb database is open in your project. 2. On the Database menu, select Export and then select Microsoft Access. The
system displays the Save to Microsoft Access database (MDB) dialog.
Tutorial 3: Importing and Exporting Databases 77
Note:
If you choose Selected lines as the Lines/Groups to save option, you can make sure the lines you wish to export are selected according to your specifications. To do this, you can can choose certain lines to select via the Line Selection Tool, which can be accessed from the line header cell popup menu and selecting, Selections|Selection Tool (as shown below).
3. Specify an Output MDB file name (Export_Access) and the rest of the options as
shown above. Click the [OK] button. 4. The system displays a progress dialog box as it creates the new Access database.
Importing a Database Table Now that you have created a Microsoft Access database we can show you how to import an Access Database. Normally you would already have created your database by actually using Access, but for purposes of this tutorial we had to create a (*.mdb) file first to be able to show you how to import one later. Geosoft’s database table import assumes that the database is a Microsoft Access database (*.mdb) If it is not, the system prompts you for a database type (any of the following): dBase III dBase IV dBase 5
FoxPro 2.0 FoxPro 2.5 FoxPro 2.6
Paradox 3.x Paradox 4.x Paradox 5.x
78 Tutorial 3: Importing and Exporting Databases T O I MPORT
A
D ATABASE T ABLE :
1. On the Database menu, select New Database. The Create New Database dialog is
displayed. Specify a New database name (Import_Access) and click the [OK] button to open a new empty database. 2. On the Database menu, select Import| Database Table and then click All Tables.
We chose the All Tables option of importing because when we originally exported this data we exported it as individual tables. Therefore, we would like to import all the tables back into the database. If we choose the Single Table option we could choose individual lines and fields we wished to import. 3. The system displays the Import Database dialog. Since you just finished creating a database to import the data into, click the [Yes] button. Note:
4. The system displays the Import Entire External Database dialog.
5. Use the [Browse] button to select Export_Access.mdb as the File to import.
Specify Lines from the Store tables as drop down menu. Click the [OK] button. The system imports file into the database.
Exporting to an Excel Comma Separated Value (CSV) File An important capability is the ability to export to Excel-style comma separated value (*.CSV) ASCII files. This timesaving feature enables you to quickly export your processed data from Oasis montaj and perform specialized analysis or processing in Excel as required. T O E XPORT
TO AN
E XCEL F ILE :
1. Make sure the tfmag.gdb database is open in your project. 2. On the Database menu, select Export and then select the CSV etc. The Export to
Other format dialog is displayed.
Tutorial 3: Importing and Exporting Databases 79
3. Specify the Format as CSV (Excel) and the output Data file Name as
Export_Excel. Click the [OK] button. The system exports the data to the designated file.
Importing an Excel Comma Separated Value (CSV) File Oasis montaj provides a variety of options for easily importing Excel data. In this tutorial, we demonstrate the use of Geosoft’s Import Wizard technology. T O I MPORT E XCEL F ILES : 1. On the Database menu, select New Database. The Create New Database dialog is
displayed. Specify a New database name as (Import_Excel) and click the [OK] button to have the system create the new empty database. 2. On the Database menu, select Import|Ascii. The Import Wizard dialog is
displayed.
3. Use the Browse (
) button to select the File to import as (Export_Excel.csv), click the [Wizard] button to begin the ASCII import wizard.
4. The system scans the file and displays the first of three Data Import Wizard
dialog boxes. The wizard displays a preview of the data file and automatically determines the File Type containing the data (i.e. Delimited — separated by commas).
80 Tutorial 3: Importing and Exporting Databases
5. In the four fields in the middle of the dialog box specify which line in the file
contains the data headings (i.e. channel names), data units (“m” or “ft” ect.), which line to begin importing data on and the number of lines to display in the preview rows. 6. If your import data had several columns of data you can use the horizontal scroll
bar at the bottom of the display window to view the columns. Click the [Next>] button to continue. 7. The second dialog box in the Data Import Wizard is displayed. Specify the
Column delimiters as Microsoft Excel CSV for the type of character used to separate the column text. In this case, the system displays the data in columns by drawing lines in the preview window indicating the way in which it is preparing to import your data. Click the [Next>] button to continue.
Tutorial 3: Importing and Exporting Databases 81
The Data Import Wizard enables you to easily import data from any Ascii spreadsheet or data file. The Data Import Wizard supports both Delimited and Fixed Field Ascii files. The Data Import Wizard also imports Microsoft Excel Comma Separated Value (CSV), Comma Delimited, White Space Delimited and Tab Delimited data files. The window at the bottom of the dialog box shows the file that is being imported. For more information about the Data Import Wizard settings, read the Ascii Import Wizard help topic or click the Help ( ) button on the dialog box 8. The system displays the third dialog box in the Data Import Wizard. The wizard has scanned your data and determined the Channel Type of data with which you are working (Data in this case). It is always good practice to review your data to ensure that the wizard has selected the correct columns. The Parameters area in the dialog box shows the name, label, type and format of data of the column highlighted in the preview window. Note: In the dialog box below, we have selected the Y column to show how the corresponding parameters are displayed in the Parameters box.
82 Tutorial 3: Importing and Exporting Databases
9. Click the [Finish] button. The system displays the Save the template? Dialog.
10. Click [Yes] to save the import template. For more information on the import
template click the Help ( displayed.
) button.The Save the template dialog box is
11. In the Template box you can either accept the default name for the import
template or rename the template. For our purpose we will accept the default name and click the [OK] button. The Import dialog box is displayed.
Tutorial 3: Importing and Exporting Databases 83
12. Click [Yes] to import data into the current database.The Import Wizard imports
the data to the Import_Excel.gdb as shown below.
Drag-n-Drop Geosoft Database Files The ability to drag database files (*.GDB) from Windows Explorer and drop them into an open project is now included in Oasis montaj. The ability to drag other file types directly from Windows Explorer and drop them into Oasis montaj for display is also available including; grid files (*.GRD), map files (*.MAP) and users can also drag XYZ files and drop them into an open database file (*.GDB). Items on the Project Explorer bar may also be dragged and dropped.
Tutorial 4: Basic Mapping and Gridding 85
Tutorial 4: Basic Mapping and Gridding Maps provide a key tool for interpretation for many earth science applications. Oasis montaj provides a wide range of capabilities for performing both basic and advanced mapping. In addition, the map is an important part of the dynamic linking and imaging capabilities in Oasis montaj. In this tutorial, we guide you through basic map creation. The general steps to follow when creating a map include: •
Selecting data for mapping
•
Creating a new map
•
Setting up map layout templates
•
Creating a base map
•
Plotting survey lines
•
Plotting profiles
•
Moving around the Map
•
Gridding data
•
Plotting contours
Later tutorials focus on custom map creation, dynamic linking and imaging, and adding special elements such as symbols to maps.
86 Tutorial 4: Basic Mapping and Gridding
Map Menus There are two main map menus, Map and Map Tools, as shown below: Map menu
Map Tools menu
Selecting Data for Mapping and Processing Oasis montaj creates base maps and map elements, and performs other processing (such as gridding) based on the lines (or groups in the case of drillhole data) selected in the database. By default, when you import data, all lines are selected. For the purpose of this tutorial, we recommend that you leave all lines selected. After you run through the tutorial initially, you may want to experiment with turning lines on and off and re-creating your map. T O S ELECT D ATA FOR P ROCESSING : 1. First ensure that the tfmag.gdb database is open and selected in your current
project.
Tutorial 4: Basic Mapping and Gridding 87 2. Select (highlight) the line header cell, right-click and from the popup menu select,
Selections and then select Selection Tool. 3. The Line Selection Tool dialog is displayed.
• • • •
You can highlight the lines you want to select or deselect individually or click the [Highlight lines by range] button to select lines by range. Clicking the [Select highlight] button or [Deselect highlight] button will either add a check mark beside the highlighted lines or remove a checkmark. Lines that are selected will have a check mark beside them and lines that are not selected will have no check mark beside them. If the line is not selected, it will not be included in the maps you create or data you process. For this tutorial make sure all the lines are selected. Click the [OK] button.
Creating a New Map Oasis montaj introduces an intelligent entity called a Map. Physically a map is a special graphic file (*.MAP) containing drawings and images. In practice, however, a map is smarter than a basic file because it enables you to edit interactively, apply dynamic linking and track the map creation processes. When you create or open a map in Oasis montaj, the system displays a Map window in the project. For a new map, the window is initially empty. For an existing map, all map elements are displayed when the window opens. An important component of the map is the map template. Templates control placement of base map elements (surrounds), contours, grids, plots, images and any other graphics elements required to complete your map. You will learn more about templates in a following exercise. For more information on mapping, map components and working with maps see the online Help. T O C REATE
A
N EW M AP :
1. Select the tfmag.gdb database in your current project. 2. On the Map Tools menu, select New Map and then select New Map from X,Y.
88 Tutorial 4: Basic Mapping and Gridding 3. The Data range to map dialog is displayed. Click the [Scan data] button to have
the system query the database for the Minimum X, Y and Maximum X, Y coordinates and the Distance units. Note: If the scanned data or grid file does not have an established unit, "metres" is assumed. It is important that the distance units accurately reflect the units of the data range. This default value can be modified in the Edit|Settings|General dialog.
4.
Click the [Next] button. The Create a new map dialog is displayed.
5. Enter a Map name (tfmag.map), Map template (portrait letter) and then click
the [Scale] button. The system automatically calculates a scale that will fit the data on the map template. Just remember to round the scale to a more efficient number (100000). 6. Click the [Finish] button display the new blank map. Note:
If no scale is specified, a scale will be chosen which will fit all of the data within the chosen map sheet.
Creating a Map Template using Interactive Tools The Interactive Map Template Creation Tool simplifies map making by providing the ability to use standard map templates from our template library or interactively create customized map templates for use within Oasis montaj.
Tutorial 4: Basic Mapping and Gridding 89
The template can be used to create simple base maps for standard presentations or very sophisticated final maps. This XML based template supports the creation of multiple data views on a single map. The user may define titles, text, logos, colour bars, and may even include background graphics or images in each view. For the power users, the templates are fully scriptable.
Working with Interactive Map Template Tool The Interactive Map Template Creation Tool is designed to simplify map making by providing easy-to-use interactive tools for modifying or creating customized map templates for use within Oasis montaj. “Data linking”, which can be used very effectively to organize the layout on an output map (especially "map" style maps where the base view has a fitting view defined) is also available. Adding a map template to your current project can be achieved in two ways:
90 Tutorial 4: Basic Mapping and Gridding
• •
On the Map Tools menu, select Map Template and then select one of two options, New Blank Map Template or New Template FromLibrary. On the Map Template Tools Bar, select one of the following buttons; New Template fromLlibrary ( (
), New Blank Template (
) or Open Map Template
).
Once you have a map template created and/or opened in your current project you can quickly and easily add new base group to your map template using the Add new base group button ( ) on the Map Template Tools Bar or by selecting the view you want to add the group to on the map template window, right-click and from the popup menu, select Add new base group. When adding new Data Views to your map template, you can define the data extents and projection information or leave the area undefined. Data groups can be added using the Add new data group to current view button ( ) on the Map Template Tools Bar or by selecting the view you want to add the group to, in the map template window, right-click and from the popup menu, select Add new data group to current view. For more information on working with the New Map Template Interactive Tools, see the Oasis montaj online Help Topics. To quickly locate help for the New Interactive Map Template Tools, specify “Interactive Map Template Tool” on the Search tab.
Automated Map Sheets The new Automated Map Sheets option creates a number of tiled maps given a map template and a master map (the master map will contain the entire area that will be divided into individual map sheets). Along with the interactive map template creation tool, users can interactively create customized map templates for use within Oasis montaj. These XML based templates support the creation of multiple data views on a single map. For more information on using the new Automated Map Sheets option, see the Automated Map Sheets Technical Note, available online at www.geosoft.com/resources/technotes/
Creating MAPPLOT Map Templates (manual) The system provides a variety of default templates that enable you to create your own standard maps with logos, custom layouts and other elements as required. For example, you may use the default A4 or A3 templates to create your own layout that you use regularly for making a map. Note: When you create a map template, it is saved permanently in your system. When you are learning the system, we suggest you experiment using the same template until you are ready to create a final version with a custom name. You may want to make up a testing template, called TEST, for example.
Tutorial 4: Basic Mapping and Gridding 91 T O C REATE Y OUR O WN MAPPLOT M AP T EMPLATE : 1. On the Map Tools menu, click New map and then click New map from X,Y. 2. The Data range to map dialog is displayed. Click the [Scan data] button to have
the system query the database for the data ranges and report the Minimum X,Y and Maximum X,Y coordinates. Click the [Next>] button. 3. The Create a New Map dialog is displayed. Enter a Map name (New
Template.map) and choose portrait A4 as the Map template. 4. Click the [Templates] button. The MAPPLOT Template Manager dialog is
displayed.
5. Click the [New] button to create a new template, so that the original template is
not overwriten. The New MAPPLOT Template dialog is displayed.
6. Use this dialog to specify a New template name (e.g. NEW_A4) and click the
[OK] button. The Edit MAPPLOT Template dialog is displayed.
92 Tutorial 4: Basic Mapping and Gridding
7. Change the Map style to (figure). Figure style maps have a layout with the title,
scale bar and north arrow located at the bottom of the map whereas map style maps have a layout with the title box, scale bar and north arrow along the right hand side of the map. You can leave the rest of the default values as they are. 8. Click the [OK] button to continue. The system will return you to the MAPPLOT
Template Manager dialog. Click the [OK] button. 9. The Create a new map dialog box is redisplayed with (NEW_A4) as the specified
Map template.
10. Click the [Scale] button. The system automatically chooses a scale that will fit the
data on the map template. Just remember to round the scale to a more efficient number (150000).
Tutorial 4: Basic Mapping and Gridding 93 11. Click the [Finish] button to create and open the empty map in your current
project.
Creating a Base Map You can customize your base map with many elements, including map surround, north arrow, scale bar, reference grids, latitude/longitude annotations, text blocks/ballons and titles. The layout of your base map can either be map or figure style. Figure style maps have a layout with the title, scale bar and north arrow located at the bottom of the map whereas map style maps have a layout with the title box, scale bar and north arrow along the right hand side of the map. The following pictures show the difference in layout between the two styles.
T O C REATE
AND
P LOT
A
F IGURE S TYLE B ASE M AP :
1. Make sure your blank tfmag.map file is open and selected in the project. 2. On the Map Tools menu, select Base Map and then select Draw Base Map. The
Basemap layout dialog is displayed.
94 Tutorial 4: Basic Mapping and Gridding
3. This dialog box is the first dialog box in the base map layout wizard. The type of
Map style that you choose here will reflect the type of dialog boxes to follow. Choose figure as the Map style and specify a Map scale of 100000. The rest of the default values are fine the way they are. Click the [Next>] button to continue.
4. The system displays the Figure style base map dialog box. You can specify
different types of display styles for the Reference grid via the drop down menu. Choose dotted lines for the Reference Grid box. Click the [Next>] button to continue.
Tutorial 4: Basic Mapping and Gridding 95
5. The system displays the Figure titles dialog box. Specify a Title (Figure Map
Style) and a Sub-Title(s) if you wish. Click the [Finish] to plot the basemap in your current open tfmag.map. Your map should look similar to the one shown below.
T O C REATE
AND
P LOT
A
M AP S TYLE B ASE M AP :
1. Create a new blank map with using the NEW_A4 Template. You will need to
modify this template to change the map style from figure to map. Call this map New Map_Map Style. Click the [Finish] button, your new blank map should be open and selected in the project.
96 Tutorial 4: Basic Mapping and Gridding 2. On the Map Tools menu, select Base map and then Draw base map. The Base
map layout dialog is displayed.
3. This dialog box is the first dialog box in the base map layout wizard. The type of
Map style that you choose here will reflect the type of dialog boxes to follow. Choose map as the Map style and specify the Map Margins as shown above. 4. Click the [Next>] button to continue. The s Full map style base map dialog is
displayed.
Tutorial 4: Basic Mapping and Gridding 97 5. You can specify different types of display styles for the Reference grid via the
dropdown menu. Choose dotted lines for this tutorial. 6. Click the [Next>] button and the Map title block dialog is displayed.
7. You can specify the map titles and sub-titles as shown above and then click the
[Finish] button to plot the basemap on the current open map. 8. Your map should look similar to the one shown below.
98 Tutorial 4: Basic Mapping and Gridding
Plotting Survey Lines For line-oriented Geoscience surveys, you may want to display survey lines (flight lines for airborne surveys. T O P LOT S URVEY L INES : 1. Select (highlight) the New Map_Map Style.map. 2. On the Map Tools menu, select Line Path. 3. The Line path plot dialog is displayed. You can leave the defaults as they are.
4. Click the [OK] button and the system displays the survey lines on your New
Map_Map Style.map map.
Plotting Profiles For line-oriented Geoscience surveys, you can also display plan view profiles of the data values for each survey line. T O P LOT P ROFILES : 1. Make sure New Map_Map Style.map is selected in your project. 2. On the Map Tools menu, click Profile. The Profile plot dialog is displayed.
Tutorial 4: Basic Mapping and Gridding 99
3. Choose the profile channel (magedited). Set the profile scale (units/mm) as 50
and the profile base as 5000. Change the line colour to red and click the [OK] button. 4. The system displays the plan profiles of the channel selected on your map. Click
the Help ( ) button for more information regarding the parameter selections available in the Profile plot dialog box.
100 Tutorial 4: Basic Mapping and Gridding
Moving Around the Map Once you have your map displayed, you may want to zoom into the map so that more detail is displayed. You may also wish to move around the map using other options. The following is a list of some of the different types of viewing options available, on the Map Layout Bar, for moving around and viewing the map with ease: Zoom Box
Click this button to activate the Zoom Box. Click on the map, then while holding down the left mouse button, move your cursor to box in the area of the map you want to zoom, click the left mouse button to select the area. Click the mouse button again to zoom to the area selected. Note: Once the box has been defined, the cursor and the box are linked and by moving the cursor around the map you can move the box to another location, and then click the left mouse button to zoom to the boxed area. You can also access this command by clicking the right mouse button on a map and selecting Zoom Box from the popup menu.
Pan
Click this button to Pan around in the currently selected map. Click the left mouse button and while holding the button down, move the hand cursor to pan around the current map area. You can also access this command by clicking the right mouse button on a map and selecting Pan from the popup menu.
Interactive Zoom
Click this button to activate the interactive zoom. Click on the area of
Tutorial 4: Basic Mapping and Gridding 101 the map you want to zoom (e.g. an anomalous location on a grid), then while holding down the left mouse button, move your cursor left to zoom out and right to zoom in on the selected area. You can also access this command by clicking the right mouse button on a map and selecting Interactive Zoom from the popup menu. Click this button to zoom in and increase the displayed map features by 50%.
Zoom In
You can also access this command by clicking the right mouse button on a map and selecting Zoom In from the popup menu. Click this button to zoom out and shrink the displayed map features by 50%.
Zoom Out
You can also access this command by clicking the right mouse button on a map and selecting Zoom Out from the popup menu. Click this button to display the whole map area in the map window.
Full Map
You can also access this command by clicking the right mouse button on a map and selecting Full Map from the popup menu. Zoom to Selection
Click this button to zoom to the selected map view or group. You can also access this command by clicking the right mouse button on a map and selecting Zoom to Selection from the popup menu.
Previous Extent
Click this button to undo all changes that you have made since the last time you saved the map. This command is useful for removing text and graphics that you may have added accidentally. When working on a map, you may prefer to use this command periodically so that you undo only a few changes at a time rather than your entire set of map edits and other changes. You can also access this command by clicking the right mouse button on a map and selecting Last View from the popup menu.
Next Extent
Click this button to redo the latest changes that you have made since the last time you saved the map. This command is useful for adding text and graphics that you may have removed accidentally.
For more information, see the May Layout Bar help topic (Help|Help Topics). T O U SE
THE
Z OOM B OX O PTION :
1. Click the Zoom Box button (
) on the Map Layout Bar, or right click on the map and select Zoom from the popup list.
2. Your cursor will turn into a crosshair. Define a box by clicking the top left and
bottom right corners of the area of interest. Then click once to execute the zoom command.
102 Tutorial 4: Basic Mapping and Gridding
. 3. The system zooms into the defined area.
T O U SE
THE
P AN O PTION :
1. On the Map Layout Bar, click (
the popup menu.
) or right click on the map and select Pan from
Tutorial 4: Basic Mapping and Gridding 103
2. Your cursor will turn into a hand
. Holding the left mouse button down, use
the mouse to pan around the map. T O U SE T HE Z OOM I N O PTION : 1. On the Map Layout Bar, click (
) or right click on the map and select from
Zoom In from the popup menu. 2. The map will be reduced by 50% in the map window. T O U SE
THE
F ULL M AP O PTION :
1. On the Map Layout Bar, click (
) or right click on the map and select Zoom to
Full Map from the popup menu. 2. The map will be displayed in full view in the map window. T O U SE
THE
L AST V IEW O PTION :
1. On the Map Layout Bar, click (
) or right click and select Last View from the
popup menu. 2. The map will be displayed as it was last displayed before a new view was shown. M AP T OOLS B AR T O U SE
THE
R EDRAW O PTION :
1. If you manually resize the map window or perform editing on the map you may
need to redraw the map to refresh its current view. On the Map Tools Bar, click ( ) or right click and select Redraw from the popup menu. 2. The map will be redrawn and redisplayed in the map window.
The last three buttons on the toolbar determine on which maps the zooming will occur: Map Only] button will zoom only the current map, which will be highlighted. • [All Maps] button will zoom all the maps, which share the same coordinate system. • [Other Maps Only] button will zoom all the other maps, which share the same coordinate system, with the exception of the current map. This allows the use of one map as a reference. To find out the function of the other buttons on the Map Tools Bar, hold the cursor over the button until a description appears. For more information on the tools on the Map Tools Bar and any other toolbar, see the online Help. •
[This
104 Tutorial 4: Basic Mapping and Gridding Map Views - Popup menu (Hotkeys displayed on the right)
Map Groups – Popup Menu (Hotkeys displayed on the right)
Tutorial 4: Basic Mapping and Gridding 105
Configurable Hotkeys Oasis montaj now provides configurable Hotkeys enabling quick and easy access to menu items including all map tools. The GX|Database Settings|Configure GDB Shortcut Keys menu item provides an interactive dialog enabling you to set your own hotkeys or view the defaults.
106 Tutorial 4: Basic Mapping and Gridding
Gridding Data Gridding refers to the process of interpolating data onto an equally spaced “grid” of values in a specified coordinate system, such as X-Y. In this system, the following gridding methods are available: •
Bi-Directional (page 106)
•
Minimum curvature (page 107)
•
Kriging (page 108)
•
Tinning (page 110)
•
Trend Enforcment Gridding (page 110)
Grid and Image Menu There is a main menu for grids and images, Grid and Image as shown below: Grid and Image Menu
The Grid and Image menu includes options for creating, processing, displaying, analyzing, and converting grids and images. Bi-Directional Bi-Directional is a numerical technique for parallel survey lines, lines with some tie lines or roughly parallel lines. Use BIGRID, if the data is collected along lines that are roughly parallel, as in the following examples:
Tutorial 4: Basic Mapping and Gridding 107
Parallel Lines
Lines with some tie lines
Roughly parallel lines
BIGRID is not able to use the tie lines, as shown in the middle example, because of the way the gridding algorithm works. If the data on the tie lines is important, RANGRID or KRIGRID should be used. The Bi-directional gridding method (BIGRID GX), is ideal for line oriented data because it inherently tends to strengthen trends perpendicular to the direction of the survey lines. In this way, BIGRID can take advantage of the fundamental characteristics of line-based surveys.
Note:
The gridding process is carried out in two principle steps. First, each line is interpolated along the original survey line to yield data values at the intersection of each required grid line with the observed line. The intersected points from each line are then interpolated in the across-line grid direction to produce a value at each required grid point. Geological trends in the data can be emphasized by the appropriate orientation of the grid so that the second interpolation is in the direction of strike. In addition to trend enhancement, BIGRID allows the method of interpolation to be selected independently for the down-line and across-line directions. The interpolations available are linear, cubic spline (minimum curvature) or Akima spline. Filtering of the line data before interpolation is also possible. BIGRID can design and apply non-linear and/or linear numerical filters to the original line data. The use of the non-linear filter is a very effective way to remove data spikes (undesired highamplitude short-wavelength features) from the original data. BIGRID has the following features: • Unlimited number of data points per survey line • Unlimited number of survey lines • Unlimited output grid size Note: The actual maximum size of the dataset or grid that you can use depends upon the available free disk space of your computer. Minimum curvature The random gridding method (RANGRID GX ) fits a minimum curvature surface to the data points using a method similar to that described by Swain (1976) and Briggs (1974). A minimum curvature surface is the smoothest possible surface that will fit the given data values.
108 Tutorial 4: Basic Mapping and Gridding
RANGRID first estimates grid values at the nodes of a coarse grid (usually 8 times the final grid cell size). This estimate is based upon the inverse distance average of the actual data within a specified search radius. If there is no data within that radius, the average of all data points in the grid is used. An iterative method is then employed to adjust the grid to fit the actual data points nearest the coarse grid nodes. After an acceptable fit is achieved, the coarse cell size is divided by 2. The same process is then repeated using the coarse grid as the starting surface. This is iteratively repeated until the minimum curvature surface is fit at the final grid cell size. A very important parameter in the RANGRID process is the number of iterations used to fit the surface at each step. The greater the number of iterations, the closer the final surface will be to a true minimum curvature surface. However, the processing time is proportional to the number of iterations. RANGRID stops iterating when: • It reaches a specified maximum number of iterations, or • A certain percentage of the observed points are within a limiting tolerance of the surface By default these limits are 100 iterations and 99% of points within 1% of the data range.. The RANGRID GX also has the following capabilities: • Accessing unlimited number of input observation points. • Adjustable internal tension. • Applying de-aliasing filter. • Applying linear and logarithmic gridding. • Applying projections. • Blanking un-sampled areas. • Outputing grids up to any size. Note: The actual maximum size of the grid that you can use depends upon the available free disk space of your computer. Kriging Kriging is a statistical gridding technique for random data, non-parallel line data or orthogonal line data. Use RANGRID or KRIGRID when the XYZ data is not sampled along lines that run in roughly the same direction. Such data are often called random, because they give a random appearance when the data locations are plotted. Also, line data with survey lines that are orthogonal (or have random directions) should be gridded with RANGRID or KRIGRID.
Tutorial 4: Basic Mapping and Gridding 109
The following figure illustrates these types of data: +
+ +++ +
+
+ +
Random Data
Non-parallel Line Data
Orthogonal Line Data
If the data is relatively smooth between sample points or survey lines, then RANGRID should be used. However, use KRIGRID, if the data • is variable between sample locations, • is known to be statistical in nature (such as geochemical data), • is poorly sampled, or • is clustered. The statistical gridding method (KRIGRID GX) uses the method of Kriging to determine a value at each grid node based on the XYZ data. KRIGRID first calculates a variogram of the data, which shows the correlation of the data as a function of distance. Simply speaking, the further data points become, the less correlation we expect between points. A variogram shows this phenomena for a given dataset, and based on the variogram, you are able to select a model that best defines the variance of the data. The technique of Kriging uses this model to estimate the data values at the nodes of the grid. A significant by-product of Kriging is the ability to estimate the error of the data at each grid node. Geosoft supports ordinary Kriging as well as universal Kriging. Universal Kriging differs from ordinary Kriging in that it allows the data to contain a regional trend. For a more in-depth understanding of geostatistical analysis and Kriging, refer to Mining Geostatistics written by A.G. Journel and C.J. Huijbregts, 1978. KRIGRID has the following capabilities: • Applies de-aliasing filter. • Applies linear and logarithmic gridding options. • Blanks un-sampled areas. • Calculates a variogram from the input data channel. • Output grids up to any size. • Processes unlimited number of input observation points.
110 Tutorial 4: Basic Mapping and Gridding
Supports linear, power, spherical, Gaussian, exponential and user defined models. Note: The actual maximum size of the grid that you can use depends upon the available free disk space of your computer. •
Tinning The ability to create a TIN (Triangular Irregular Network), and to use this TIN file to grid data using the Nearest Neighbour , Linear or Natural Neighbour methods has been added to the Oasis montaj environment. The TIN is created from a set of spatial data using the public domain Sweepline algorithm implemented by Steven Fortune of Bell Laboratories (Fortune, S 1987). The TINDB GX applies the Sweepline algorithm to the X, Y (Z-optional) data values in a Geosoft database (*.gdb) to create a binary TIN (*.tin) file. When Z values are included in the (*.tin) file, a TIN grid can be created using the TINGRID GX. The TINGRID GX applies the Nearest Neighbour, Linear or Natural Neighbour (Sambridge, Brown & McQueen 1995) algorithm to the Z values in the (*.tin) file to create a grid. The TIN gridding method requires one data point for each (X, Y) data location in the database. Tinning provides the ability to sum or average duplicate samples − data that have multiple Z values at single point locations. (Note that, when Z values are included in the (*.tin) file, only data point locations with non-dummy Z values are included.) Geosoft Tinning provides a number of ways of visualizing the TIN, including the ability to plot the TIN Nodes, the TIN Mesh (or Delaunay triangulation), the Convex Hull, and the Voronoi cells of your data. Trend Enforcement Gridding A traditional problem in gridding geophysical data, is the aliasing problem that occurs due to the presence of more samples “along the lines” than across lines. This problem leads to obvious effects including ellipsoids or ellipsoidal “beads” between lines in gridded data. There are various solutions to these types of effects including filtering and gridding along trend directions. However, these techniques may reduce geologic signal or obscure local trends. Oasis montaj “Trend Enforcement algorithm” is designed to provide a solution that preserves the character of local trends while eliminating aliasing effects. To learn how to perform trend enforcement gridding in Oasis montaj, refer to Tutorial 16: Trend Enforcement Gridding page 269. Gridding using the Bi-directional gridding method In this example, we will use Bi-directional gridding (since the data are oriented in parallel lines and we expect to have cross-line trending). You can apply Bidirectional gridding by using the Bi-Directional Line Gridding menu option or running a Control File that contains the gridding commands and parameters. The
Tutorial 4: Basic Mapping and Gridding 111
procedures for both methods are provided. However, you will only need to follow one of the methods to perform the Bi-directional gridding successfully. If you are a new user, we recommend choosing the first method. T O A PPLY B I -D IRECTIONAL G RIDDING
TO
XYZ D ATA:
1. Select the tfmag.gdb database. 2. On the Grid and Image menu, select Gridding|Bi-Directional Line Gridding. The
Bi-directional gridding of line data dialog is displayed.
3. From the Channel to grid dropdown list, select (magedited) and specify the
Output grid name as tfmag (note that, the file extension *.grd will be added by the system). 4. The grid cell size should be 1/4 to 1/8 of the line separation distance. The line
separation is 200 metres; therefore, we will use a Grid cell size of 50. For more information on these parameters, click the Help ( ) button. Click the [Advanced>] button to continue. The Advanced Gridding options dialog is displayed.
112 Tutorial 4: Basic Mapping and Gridding
5. We can leave these parameters to the intelligent defaults, for detailed information
click the Help ( ) button. Click the [Finish] button and the data will be gridded and displayed in your current project. Note: The cell size is the distance between grid points in the X and Y directions. In most situations the cell size can be selected as 1/4 to 1/8 of the line separation, or the minimum station interval, whichever is greater. By default, BIGRID will choose a cell size based upon these criteria, although we do recommend that you choose the cell size directly T O A PPLY B I -D IRECTIONAL G RIDDING
TO
XYZ D ATA U SING
A
C ONTROL F ILE :
1. On the Grid and Image menu, select Gridding|From Control File and then select
Bi-Directional Control File. The Bi-directional gridding dialog is displayed.
Tutorial 4: Basic Mapping and Gridding 113
2. Specify the Data channel to grid (magedited) from the drop down menu. Also
specify a name for the New grid file (tfmag_con). We will leave the Transverse gradient channel blank as this parameter doesn’t apply to our data. For information on this parameter, click the Help (
) button.
3. The next step is to specify a Control file. Normally you would specify an existing
control file that contains your bi-directional gridding (BIGRID) commands and parameters. However, in this tutorial, since no BIGRID control file exists, specify the name of a new control file to create (tfmag.con). 4. Click the [Edit Controls] button and the Select a default text editor dialog is
displayed.
5. This dialog is only displayed if you have not selected a default text editor yet. Use
the [Browse] button to locate a text editor (like Notepad) and click the [OK] button to display the Edit file using notepad.exe dialog.
6. The ftmag.con file is selected by default, click the [OK] button. The system
displays the control file you specified (tfmag.con) using your default text editor. 7. The control file contains comments that explain how to use the BIGRID
parameters. The rest of the control file is blank. 8. Close the tfmag.con control file and click the [Grid] button on the Bi-directional
line gridding dialog to grid the data and display it in your current project.
114 Tutorial 4: Basic Mapping and Gridding Note:
We did not specify any parameters in the bigrid control file, therefore the grid was gridded using only the intelligent defaults.
Voxels (3D Gridding) You can create a Voxel using the Voxel Gridding option, located on the 3D Tools|Gridding menu. A "voxel" is short for "volume pixel" the smallest distinguishable box-shaped part of a three-dimensional image. A Voxel is the 3D conceptual counterpart of the 2D pixel. 3D Tools Menu
The 3D Tools menu includes options for creating, processing, displaying, analyzing, converting, extracting (sections and plans) and generating isosurfaces from 3D grids. Create a Voxel Grid Use the 3D Tools|Gridding|Voxel Gridding menu option to perform 3D Gridding, which will use a basic statistical kriging algorithm to create a 3D voxel grid model from 3D data contained in a Geosoft database (GDB file). The data to be gridded must have defined X, Y and Z fields that locate the data within a coordinate system in which Z coordinates are interpreted as positive up. Note: When gridding your data it is important to note that if you reduce the cell size by half then both the file size and processing time are increased by 8 times (2 cubed). T O C REATE 3D V OXEL G RID : 1. Open a database that includes defined X, Y and Z fields that locate the data within
a coordinate system in which Z coordinates are interpreted as positive up. 2. On the 3D Tools menu, select Gridding|Voxel Gridding. The 3D Gridding dialog
will be displayed.
Tutorial 4: Basic Mapping and Gridding 115
3. Using the dropdown list, select the Data to grid and a default Output voxel file
name will be provided. You can rename the voxel or accept the default name. 4. Select to Display the voxel in the Current map, New map or to not display it. The
Cell size can be left to the intelligent defaults. Note that, if you reduce the cell size by half then both the file size and processing time are increased by 8 times (2 cubed). 5. Clicking the
button displays the Advanced and Variogram tab dialogs.
6. Click the [OK] button when you are satisfied with your selections and the Voxel
will be created and displayed (if selected) to the current map.
Displaying a Grid There are a number of options for displaying grids; these include displaying single grids, colour shaded grids, ternary image grids, two-grid composites (for shadedrelief maps), three-grid composites (for ternary maps) and four-grid composites. In this example, we will display a single grid. Grids appear in the Project Explorer under "Grids". Opening a grid opens a view of the grid in its own internal "map". A grid map view is just like a real map and can accept any graphics that a map can. It can also be saved as a map, in which case the map will appear in the "Map" section of the project explorer. When displaying grids, you must specify a colour table to use (supplied with the product). You may want to experiment with different colour tables to see how they affect your image. T O D ISPLAY
A
S INGLE G RID
ON A
M AP :
1. Open and select the tfmag.map that we created earlier with a basemap. 2. On the Grid and Image menu, select Display|Single grid. The Place a grid on a
map dialog is displayed.
116 Tutorial 4: Basic Mapping and Gridding
3. Use the Browse (
) button to select the Grid name as (tfmag.grd).
4. We can leave the remaining parameters to the defaults and click the [Current
Map] button. The tfmag.grd grid is displayed as on the tfmag.map.
Tutorial 4: Basic Mapping and Gridding 117
Recolour Grids Click the Auto-Recolour Grids ( ) button in the Map Tools Bar to toggle the Auto Recolour Grids option on/off. This option recolours the displayed grid area as the grid extents change within a map window (e.g. when zooming or panning). Note that, when turned ON the grid values stay the same. However, as the viewed extents of the grid change; the grid colour is recalculated and redrawn using the entire colour palette over the current displayed grid area. • When this option is ON any changes made to the extents of the viewed grid area will cause the grid to be recoloured based on the grid values in the current viewed area, using the entire colour palette. • When this option is ON all displayed grids will be recoloured when changes are made to the extents of the viewed area. • When Auto Recolour Grids is OFF the grids return to their original colours. The Auto Recolour Grids option is a temporary viewing tool. To save/share a recoloured view of a grid you can Create a Snapshot (see page 119) or print the current map extents. Note: If the Auto Recolour Grid mode is turned ON when you print, it will apply to the printed page. Either turn OFF the mode when printing or print out a selected area and it will apply the recolouring.
Drag-n-Drop Geosoft Grid Files The ability to drag grid files (*.GRD) from Windows Explorer and drop them into an open project is now included in Oasis montaj. The ability to drag other file types directly from Windows Explorer and drop them into Oasis montaj for display is also available including; database files (*.GDB), map files (*.MAP), and users can also drag XYZ files and drop them into an open database file (*.GDB). Items on the Project Explorer bar may also be dragged and dropped.
Plotting Contours Contours refer to the lines drawn at specified intervals or multiples of intervals on your map based on a gridded dataset. After you create a grid, you may want to contour your data and display these contours on your map. In Oasis montaj, contouring is specially designed to handle the very large dynamic data ranges that characterize Earth Science data sets. For more information on plotting contours, refer to the Adding Contours to Maps topic in the Online Help system. Contouring options include quick, custom, log and from a control file (for batch contouring). • Quick - uses default parameters.
118 Tutorial 4: Basic Mapping and Gridding
• • •
Custom - uses parameters you specify the system to use. This method generates simple or log contours. Log contour - Draws contours on a map using a specified grid in logarithmic mode Have Control File - ASCII control file enables full cartographic cosmetic control of plotting options
In this example, we will use the automatic (quick) method. T O Q UICK C ONTOUR
A
G RID :
1. Make sure the tfmag.map is open and selected in your project. 2. On the Map Tools menu, select Contour and then select the Quick. The Contour
dialog is displayed.
3. Click the Browse ( 4.
) button to select the grid you want to contour (tfmag.grd).
Click the [OK] button. The contours are drawn on the map.
Tutorial 4: Basic Mapping and Gridding 119
Snapshots Use the Manage Snapshots dialog, found on the Map menu, to open, rename or delete your map snapshots.
Map snapshots (or bookmarks) are saved views of the map extents, based on the coordinate system and units of the map view. Map snapshots enable you to return to a favourite location on your map quickly and easily.
120 Tutorial 4: Basic Mapping and Gridding
The snapshot option was designed to help improve your workflow and ease of use. For example, if you are working on a regional scale map and have a number of active project areas (or a number of anomalies in one project area) you can use this tool to quickly and easily zoom into your areas of interest. How to Create a Snapshot The Create Snapshot option can be found on the Map menu, Navigation Bar ( and various Map popup menus.
)
1. Zoom into an area of interest on your current map. Right-click and from the
popup menu select Create Snapshot. The Set Snapshot Name dialog is displayed.
2. Specify a descriptive name for your snapshot and click the [OK] button. The
snapshot will be saved with the current map. How to View a Snapshot Snapshots can be quickly and easily viewed using the dynamic Snapshot menu item on the Map popup menus. 1. Open and select a map that already includes associated “Snapshots”. Right-click,
and from the popup menu select Snapshots. A dynamic sub-menu will be displayed listing all of the snapshots associated with the current map.
2. Select one of the previously created snapshots and your current map will be
redrawn to the extents of the selected Snapshot.
Close and Save Project The next tutorial (Tutorial 5: Map Editing and CAD Tools) is designed to introduce you to basic map editing and CAD tools. In order to preserve your current databases
Tutorial 4: Basic Mapping and Gridding 121
and maps we will save and close this project. We will open this project to use again in Tutorial 6: Imaging and Dynamic Linking. Closing a project will save all of your project databases, maps and profiles, plus information that tells the system whether you are working on a map or profile and the state in which you left it the last time you used it. T O C LOSE
A
P ROJECT
1. On the File menu, select Project and then select Close. The Save Modified
Documents dialog is displayed.
2. This dialog enables you to select All, None or Selected (highlighted) files. To
select more than one file at a time hold the key to select consecutive files or hold the key to select individual files. 3. For this tutorial, click the [All] button to save all open databases, maps and grids
in the project.
Tutorial 5: Map Editing and CAD Tools 123
Tutorial 5: Map Editing and CAD Tools This tutorial is designed to introduce you to the basic map editing and CAD functions in Oasis montaj. The procedures are designed to show you how you can use these tools to draw an interpretation from geophysical data. The tutorial also shows how you can use the clipboard to copy, import, and export map groups and images. This tutorial will show you how to: • Display an interpretation map • Create a group • Hide, move, or mask a group • Create and apply a mask • View and edit groups • Draw lines on a map • Convert lines to polygons • Use the “Snap to line” and “Snap to point” tools • Change line symbols and polygon patterns • Using the eyedropper and fill tools • Using the Polygon Edit Tools • Use the clipboard to copy, import and export map elements
Before you Begin This tutorial uses a background map called mag.map. These files are provided on the CD-ROM in the Oasis montaj/data/various directory. Before you begin this tutorial you will need to copy the background map to a working directory and create a new project.
Create a Project In order to begin working in Oasis montaj you must have an open project. The procedures below describe how to open a new project. T O C REATE
A
N EW P ROJECT :
1. On the File menu, select Project and then select New. The New Project dialog is
displayed. 2. Specify a name and directory for the project. For example, name the project
Interp and specify the working directory as D:\Tutorial\cad. Oasis montaj will automatically look for your data in the directory containing this project. Make sure you copy the sample data file (mag.map, mag.grd and mag.GRD.gi) for this tutorial to your project directory (D:\tutorial\cad). 3. Click [Save]. The system saves the project with the corresponding name.
124 Tutorial 5: Map Editing and CAD Tools
Displaying an Interpretation Map Now that you have opened a project, you can display the map you want to interpret. 1. On the Map menu, select Open map the Open Map dialog box is displayed. Select
the mag.map file in your project directory (C:\tutorial\cad). Click the [Open] button to select the file. 2. The map which includes a geophysical grid will be displayed in the map window,
C:\tutorial\cad\mag.map
Note: If you would like to change the colour pallet of your grid to pastel, as shown above, simply redisplay the mag.grd file using the Colour table as (pastel.tbl) or while in Map Group Mode (click the (
) button) select the grid, right click and
from the popup menu select Image Colour tool. Using the Load from File icon ( ), select the pastel.tbl from the “…\Oasis montaj\tbl”directory. Click [Open] and then [OK] on the Image Colour tool, the grid will be displayed using the pastel colour table. (Note, if the grid is not redrawn on closing the Image Colout Tool. click the Redraw ( ) button on the Map Tools Bar, and the grid will be refreshed, displaying the pastel colour table.
Understanding the Parts of a Map In Oasis montaj, Maps are special items that serve a number of purposes in the system. First, the map window provides the basic mechanism for creating maps, images and linking to other maps and data. Secondly, Maps provide a means of editing graphics, adding text and creating highly customized final presentations for output to printers and plotters. To work effectively with maps, you need to be familiar with the purposes of maps in the system as well as the role of views and groups.
Tutorial 5: Map Editing and CAD Tools 125
Base and Data Views Geosoft Maps use Views to organize and display information. A view divides the information on a map into a Base view, which uses paper coordinates and a Data view, which uses ground coordinates. Map surrounds, north arrows, and scale bars are examples of map groups plotted in the Base view. Map coordinates, contours, and grids are examples of map groups that are plotted in the Data view. 3D Views A 3D View can be created from an existing 2D View or Group already displayed on a map, or directly from a grid file. Specialized GX’s may also create 3D views for their own purposes. Like 2D Views, a 3D view also represents coordinates, but in this case in X,Y AND Z. 3D Views may also contain any number of drawing planes. Any Group or drawing object that can be drawn on a 2D View can be drawn on a Plane in a 3D View. Each plane in a 3D view can be oriented independently in the 3D coordinate system. A Plane in a 3D view can be flat or it can have a surface relief defined by a grid file. The 3D Tool has a simple tab dialog box with a corresponding 3D Viewer window. The 3D Viewer enables you to change the orientation of the 3D View relative to your point of view by rotating the coordinate system horizontally and vertically and by zooming and panning. The 3D View can be modified using the 3D Tool, including defining the orientation, setting relief grid controls and transparency levels of individual planes, and specifying axis labels. For more information on creating and working with 3D Views see Tutorial 14: 3D Views in Oasis montaj page 239. Groups Oasis montaj uses Groups to determine the order in which objects are displayed (rendered) on a map. Examples of Groups in the Base view include a north arrow, title text box, or a scale bar. Examples of Groups in the Data view include lines, polygons, grids, and images. You can create, edit, move, hide, and mask groups. You can also move groups in front and behind each other. Any new object you add to a map, such as a polygon or line, is added to the current group. View/Group Manager Tool You can use the View/Group Manager tool ( ) to display and edit the Views and Groups in a map. This tool (see example on next page) consists of a ‘tree’ structure that contains two main branches representing the Base view and the Data view. Under each view, a number of groups are listed according to their layer on the map. Each group in a view shows an icon beside its name that identifies the group as either a map vector object ( ) or an aggregate ( ) . Views can either be normal 2D views ( ) or 3D views ( visibility of an item.
). The check boxes in the tree controls and indicates
126 Tutorial 5: Map Editing and CAD Tools
To select single items in the tree click on the item desired. Multiple selections of groups within a view can be achieved by holding the key and clicking on the desired items. Changing the selection during group editing will end group editing without cancelling any current changes. The effect of a double click on any item depends on the state of the map. If in shadow cursor mode the map will switch to either group or view selection mode and select the item that was clicked upon. If the map is already in either of these selection modes a double click has the same effect as hitting the button or using the activate shortcut key (default key). The group on the top layer (closest to the front) is listed first, followed by the next layer behind it, followed by the rest of the layers to the bottom layer at the end of the list. It is possible to control the render order in the tree by using the Drag n Drop technology. The Drag n Drop capability enables you to move map groups up and down within Views and also to move Views relative to each other.
R ENDERING O PTIONS
Check the Render images first box to render (draw) the images groups first. Check the Auto-Redraw box to automatically redraw the map when a change is made to it.
Tutorial 5: Map Editing and CAD Tools 127
Click the Redraw button to redraw the map when changes are made to the groups in the View/Group Manager and the Auto-Redraw option is off. Frozen Scale Click this button to freeze the scale of the currently selected map group, independent of the view scale of the map. For example, when zooming in the text size in a group will not grow but remain the same size on the screen. Visible Scale Click this button to set a scale range in which the currently selected Group will be visible. For example, individual groups may be made visible only at specific scales. Then, while zooming, if the map scale is outside the range, the group is not drawn.
The View/Group Manager Tool is a “modeless” dialog, which means it can remain open while you work on your map. It can be toggled on or off using the “M” hot key and can even be docked on the side of your screen or at the top with the toolbars. O THER T OOL O PTIONS
The other Tool options include moving, masking, transparency settings, editing and deleting. All of the following properties require the licensed version. Moveable Check the Moveable box to enable the movement of the selected group on the map using the cursor. Masked to View Check the Masked to View box to mask the selected view using the mask applied to the View (Map Tools|Masking|Apply View Mask VIEWCLIP.GX). This option enables you to apply a mask to selected groups within a View. Mask to Group region Using the Mask to Group region dropdown list, select the extended view mask applied to the View (Map Tools|Masking|Add|Replace group mask in view - VIEWEXTCLIP.GX). This option enables you to save the mask into the map and activate it on specific groups in the View. Transparency Check the Transparency box to enable the slider (Transparent - Opaque). Move the slider to the transparency level wanted for the selected group. Edit Click the button to edit (or activate) the selected item. Note: Double click on a group or view in a map or using the activate shortcut key (default Enter-Key) will also activate the edit mode for that item. The edit mode depends on the item; group edit mode for vector groups, image color
128 Tutorial 5: Map Editing and CAD Tools
tool for images and color symbols and 3D Viewer for 3D views. Delete Click the Delete button to delete the selected View/Group. Note: If you delete a group my mistake or make any other undesired changes, you can click the Undo last map change ( ) button on the Standard Toolbar or use the shortcut (Default Ctrl-Z) at any time to undo any changes and revert to the original map.
Create a New Group The following procedure demonstrates how to create a new group. The procedures for moving, hiding and Masking groups are included in later steps of this tutorial. T O C REATE
A
N EW G ROUP :
1. On the Map Tools menu, select CAD Tools|New group. The Create a new empty
group in a view dialgo is displayed.
2. Using the View dropdown list, select (data) and in the New group name box,
specify the name as (Interp). 3. Click the [OK] button. The Map Group Editing Bar is enabled.
Selecting and Editing Groups When you create a new group, this group becomes selected and you can edit it. A group is open for editing whenever you see the Map Group Editing Bar displayed. There are two different ways to select another group to edit. M ETHOD 1
The first method is to use the View/Group Manager Tool . This manager tool provides a single dialog that enables you to switch between different groups, change their properties (moveable, hidden, masked), and changing their layering order (move groups to the front or back).
Tutorial 5: Map Editing and CAD Tools 129 U SING
THE
V IEW /G ROUP M ANAGER :
1. First select the map you want to edit and make sure the Map Group Mode (
)
button is selected. 2. On the Map Tools Bar, select the View/Group Manager (
) button.
3. The View/Group Manager Tool is displayed. The currently selected group
(Interp) is highlighted. To switch to another group, click on the group name so that it becomes highlighted.
4. Click the [Edit] button and the group is selected and in edit mode on your map
and the Map Group Editing Bar is displayed. 5. When you are done editing the group, right-click and from the popup menu, select
End Editing. M ETHOD 2
The second method of selecting and editing a group is to use the Mapping popup menu. You may find this method quicker when you are editing and switching between groups frequently.
130 Tutorial 5: Map Editing and CAD Tools TO
QUICKLY
S ELECT
AND
E DIT
A
G ROUP
1. Make sure the Map Group Mode (
) button is selected. Place your cursor on the map, right-click and from the popup menu, select Groups and then select the name of the group you would like to select (e.g. Data\Interp). Then, right-click on the map again and this time select Edit this group from the popup menu. The group is selected and in edit mode on your map and the Map Group Editing Bar is displayed.
2. When you are done editing the group, right-click and from the popup menu, select
End Editing.
Hiding, Moving and Masking Map Groups The following three procedures will show you how to control how groups are displayed on a map. Hiding a Group. Sometimes, when you have many groups on a map you may not want to display all them on your final map. The procedure below shows you how to hide the grid in your map. T O H IDE
A
G ROUP
ON A
M AP :
1. First select the map you want to edit and make sure the Map Group Mode (
)
button is selected. 2. Click View/Group Manager tool button (
).
3. In the dialog box, highlight the group (AGG_mag) you want to hide and remove
the check box from the box directly infront of the icon. . 4. Click [OK]. The grid on the map is hidden from view. To display the group
again, add the check mark back again. 5. You can also make a group hidden or visible by selecting the group in a map,
right clicking and from the popup menu, select Status|Hidden. Moving a Group To move a group around a map with your cursor, you must first select the Moveable option for that group. Once this option is set, you can move the group by selecting it and moving it with the cursor. T O M OVE
A
G ROUP :
1. First you must make sure the Moveable option is set for the group. There are two
methods of doing this:
Tutorial 5: Map Editing and CAD Tools 131
One method is to select the View/Group Manager Tool button ( ). Using the Manager tool, select (highlight) the name of the group, then place a check in the Moveable box. Click [OK]. • The second method is to select the group in the map by clicking on the group with the left mouse button. Then click the right mouse button. On the popup menu, click Moveable. 2. Now place the cursor anywhere inside the group. The cursor will change into a set of directional arrows ( ). •
3. Holding down the left mouse button, drag the group in the direction you want to
move it. Masking a Group Masking a group involves using a polygon or rectangular mask file to make only a specific area of a group visible. To mask a group, you must first create and apply a mask to a view. You can then use this mask on specific groups in the view areas of the group outside the mask. The following three procedures show you the steps to create a mask, apply it to a view, and turn Masking on for a group. T O C REATE
A
R ECTANGULAR PLY F ILE :
1. On the Database Tools menu, select Window Data, then select Create
Rectangular PLY file. The Define a rectangular plot mask dialog is displayed. 2. Click the [Interactive] button. The Define rectangle dialog box is displayed.
Click the [OK] button to continue.
3. Use the mouse to draw a rectangle on the map (Mag.map). The Define a
rectanglular plot mask dialog is then displayed with the coordinates of the rectangle, as shown in the dialog below.
132 Tutorial 5: Map Editing and CAD Tools
4. Specify the mask file name as rectanglemask.ply and from the dropdown list
select inclusive. This means that when the mask is applied to a group, only features inside the rectangle mask will be visible. 5. Click [New File] to save the mask file. T O A PPLY
A
M ASK
TO A
V IEW :
1. On the Map Tools menu, select Masking, then select ApplyView Mask. The Reset
view clip region dialog is displayed.
2. Using the Browse button, specify the Clip polygon file (.ply) as
(rectanglemask.ply) and select the Map view as Data. In the Clip all groups box, select (no). This will set the Masking option to off for all other groups in the view. 3. Click the [OK] button. T O M ASK
A
G ROUP :
1. Select the map you want to edit and make sure the Map Group Mode (
) button
is selected. 2. Click View/Group Manager Tool button (
). In the dialog box, highlight the
group (AGG_mag) you want to mask. 3. Place a check mark in the Masked to View box. Click the Redraw (
) button.
4. The map is redrawn to display only the section of the grid inside the mask.
Tutorial 5: Map Editing and CAD Tools 133
5. You can also turn Masking on or off by selecting a group in a map, and on the
Map Tools menu, select Masking|Clear View Mask. The mask will be cleared from the View.
Drawing Lines, Polylines and Polygons You can use the line and the polyline tools to draw linear features such as dykes and faults. You can then connect these lines and create shaded polygons to mark different geological or geophysical areas of the site. Drawing Polylines The procedure below shows you how to draw polylines on your map and how to create polygons from these lines. This procedure also shows you how to use the Snap to point and Snap to line tools, which are useful for ensuring that your lines connect each other without overlapping. D RAWING P OLYLINES
TO I DENTIFY
L INEAR F EATURES :
1. Select the mag.map. 2. Make sure the Map Group Mode (
) button is selected. Right-click mouse
button on the map. 3. On the popup menu, select Groups, then select name of the group you would like
to select (Interp). 4. To edit the selected group, right-click on the map and select Edit This Group from
the popup menu. The Map Group Editing Bar is displayed. 5. On the Map Group Editing Bar, click the Polyline tool (
) button.
134 Tutorial 5: Map Editing and CAD Tools 6. Draw a line along the edge of an anomaly. Click cursor on the place you want the
line to start, and then move the mouse, clicking wherever you want to change direction. When you are finished, right click and from the popup menu, select Done.
7. Draw another polyline roughly parallel to the first (as shown below).
8. You can now connect other polylines to the ones you have just drawn. To do this
click on the polyline tool button. 9. Click right mouse button. A dialog box is displayed that enables you to choose
whether you want the new polyline from a location along the existing line or a point on the line. Note: To just draw a line and not connect it to a previous line, select Cancel and left click to draw the line (as you did in step 2 for the first polyline).
Tutorial 5: Map Editing and CAD Tools 135 10. Choose the Snap to point option. The cursor will change to a circle with a shaded
centre.
11. When you move the cursor over a point or node along the line, the cursor changes
to a target symbol with the shaded circle indicating the location of the point.
12. To begin drawing a new polyline from this point, click left mouse button. 13. Move the cursor and click left button to define the shape of the line. Draw the
polyline so your last point is located just short of the second line (see below).
14. Click right mouse button. On the popup menu, click Snap to line. The cursor will
change to a circle. Use this cursor to search for a section of the line to connect to. The Snap to line cursor works like this: • •
When the cursor is searching for a line to connect to, it looks like: When the cursor finds a line it can connect to, it changes to:
15. Once you have the cursor on the line where you want it, click left mouse button to
insert a point. 16. Click right mouse button, and then select Done to finish drawing the line. 17. Repeat the previous steps to add more polylines to your map so that it looks
something like the following:
136 Tutorial 5: Map Editing and CAD Tools
Changing Line Attributes This procedure shows you how to modify the attributes (thickness, colour and pattern) of the lines you drew in the previous steps. C HANGING L INE A TTRIBUTES : 1. Select the line you would like to edit by clicking the left mouse button on it.
Sizing handles are displayed around the line, indicated it is selected. 2. Right-click and from the popup menu, select Attributes. The Polyline Attributes
dialog box is displayed.
3. In the Thickness box, you can specify the line thickness in millimetres (0.1 is the
default). 4. To change the line colour, click on the Draw Colour box. A colour palette dialog
box is displayed for you to choose a colour.
Tutorial 5: Map Editing and CAD Tools 137 5. To change the line pattern, make sure there is a check mark in Styled Line check
box. Double click in the Styled Line box to display the LineAttributes dialog box.
6. In the Pattern Family box you can select from a variety of different sets of
patterns (Standard Patterns, Fancy lines, Geology, Arrows, Slashes, and Shapes). In the Pattern box, click on the pattern you would like to apply. You can also set the pitch (which is the distance between the symbols or dashes in the line). Click the [OK] button when you are finished. 7. Click Smooth check box to smooth the rough edges in the polyline into smooth
curves. 8. Click [OK] to apply the changes to the line or click [Cancel] to exit the dialog
without making any changes. Creating Polygons from Lines After delineating different areas of your map with polylines and/or lines, you can use these lines to create polygons. This process will convert all the lines in the current group into polygons. If you have lines that you do not want converted to polygons either create these lines in a different group or ensure that the lines are not connected to other lines to create polygons. T O C REATE P OLYGONS
FROM
L INES :
1. On the Map Tools menu, select CAD Tools|Create PLY File from Map Group.
The Create polygon file from group dialog is displayed.
138 Tutorial 5: Map Editing and CAD Tools
2. Using the Select a View/Group dropdown list, select the View\Group as
(Data\Interp) and then in the Output polygon file box, specify the name of your polygon file as (group_polygon.ply). 3. Click the [OK] button to create a polygon file from your lines in the selected
group. 4. To create fills for the closed polygons, on the Map Tools menu, select Create
Fills for Closed Polylines. The Create a polygon area group from a line group dialog will be displayed.
5. The Line group to process box should contain the group of lines that you want to
convert to polygons. 6. The Use colours or patterns box has three options for shading polygons: colours,
patterns or both. Choose (both) to use both colours and patterns. 7. The number of units indicates the number of boxes of categories you want to
create in the legend. The default is 10. You can edit these boxes later. 8. Select Yes to add a legend to the map. Click [OK] to continue. 9. Specify the legend settings in the Legend dialog box.
Tutorial 5: Map Editing and CAD Tools 139
10. Click the [OK] button to create polygons and a legend similar to the map below.
E DITING P OLYGONS
AND
L EGEND B OXES :
1. You can edit both polygons and their associated legend boxes in the same way.
While you are in Map Group Mode, move the cursor to the polygon or box you want to edit and double-click the left mouse button. The Polygon Attributes dialog box is displayed.
140 Tutorial 5: Map Editing and CAD Tools
2. To change the fill colour, click on the Colour box. A colour palette dialog box is
displayed for you to choose a colour. To turn line colouring off (i.e. make the line invisible) remove the check mark from the Filled check box. You can select a line colour the same way using the Draw Edge | Colour box instead. 3. To change the fill pattern, make sure there is a check mark in Fill pattern check
box. Double-click in the Pattern box to display the Pattern Attributes dialog.
Tutorial 5: Map Editing and CAD Tools 141
4. In the Pattern Family box you can select from three different sets of patterns
(Objects, Hatches or Solid Fill). In the Pattern box, click on the pattern you would like to apply. 5. You can also set the Tile Size and Tile Density, which changes the space between
the pattern symbols and the Line Thickness (% of Tile Size), which changes the size of the individual pattern symbols. Click the [Refresh] button to see what the pattern will look like in the example box. 6. Click the [OK] button when you are finished selecting a pattern or click [Cancel]
to exit the dialog without making any changes. 7. Click [OK] on the Polygon Attribute dialog box to apply the changes to the
polygon or click [Cancel] to exit the dialog without making any changes.
142 Tutorial 5: Map Editing and CAD Tools
Using the Get Colour and Polygon Colour Tools Using the Get Colour Tool (eyedropper) and the Polygon fill tool (bucket) on the Map Group Editing Bar, you can copy fill colours and patterns from one polygon and apply them to another polygon. A description of each tool and how to use them is provided below. G ET C OLOUR T OOL
You access the Get Colour Tool by clicking on its button in the Map Group Editing Bar. The image cursor will change to an eyedropper.
Button Cursor
P OLYGON F ILL T OOL
You access the Polygon Fill tool by clicking on its button in the Map Group Editing Bar. The image cursor will change to a bucket. T O C OPY
A
C OLOUR
FROM ONE
P OLYGON
1. Click on the Get Colour button (
TO
Button Cursor
A NOTHER :
) in the Map Group Editing Bar. The image
cursor will change to an eyedropper (
).
2. To get a colour (and pattern) from a polygon, place the eyedropper cursor over
the polygon containing the colour you want and click left mouse button. 3. The cursor will change to a bucket (
). Click on the polygon to which you want to apply the fill. The polygon now contains the new colour (and pattern).
Polygon Edit Tools Polygon Edit tools are now provided with Oasis montaj. These tools will enable you to edit polygon vertices, add exclusion regions to polygons, and tools to switch between editing the vertices of main polygons (Islands) and vertices of the exclusion regions polygons (Holes).
Tutorial 5: Map Editing and CAD Tools 143
Map Edit popup menu
Edit polygon vertices The ability to edit polygon vertices has been added to the Oasis montaj Mapping and Processing System. The Edit Vertices option is available on the “Map Edit” popup menu when you are in Group Edit mode and have a polygon selected on your current map. For instructions on Editing Vertices see To Add/Remove Vertices on a Polygon below.
Polygon Edit Tools
Description Edit Vertices. Use this tool to edit the vertices of a previously created polygon. Add Vertices. Use this tool to add new vertices to a polygon. Delete Vertices. Use this tool to delete vertices from a polyon. Add New Rectangular Island. Use this tool to add a new rectangular “Island” to a previously created polygon. Add New Polygon Island. Use this tool to add a new polygon “Island” to a previously created polygon. Add New N-Sided Polygon Island. Use this tool to draw a new N-sided polygon “Island” to a previously created polygon. Add New Rectangular Hole. Use this tool to add a new rectangular “Hole” to a previously created polygon “Island”. Add New Polygon Hole. Use this tool to add a new polygon “Hole” to a previously created polygon “Island”. Add New N-Sided Polygon Hole. Use this tool to draw a new N-sided polygon “Hole” to a previously created polygon “Island”. Cycle to Previous Hole/Island. Use this tool to cycle (switch) to the previous Hole or Island. Cycle to Next Hole/Island. Use this tool to cycle (switch) to the next Hole or Island. Delete Current Hole/Island. Use this tool to delete the current Hole or Island.
144 Tutorial 5: Map Editing and CAD Tools
To Add/Remove Vertices on a Polygon Vertices can be added or removed from polygons by using the plus (+) and minus (-) keys on your Number Keypad. Note: The plus (+) and minus (-) keys on the main alpha-numeric keypad will not work; you MUST use the Number Keypad only. T O A CCESS
THE
E DIT P OLYGON V ERTICES O PTION :
1. Click the Map Group Mode (
) button and select the group on your map that includes the polygon you wish to edit.
2. While holding your cursor over your map, right click and from the “Map Edit”
popup menu select, Edit This Group. The group will now be in Edit mode (you will see a box with hatch marks around the group, this is a visual clue that you are in Edit mode). 3. Select the “Polygon” that you want to edit and then right click and from the “Map
Edit” popup menu you can now select Edit Vertices. The vertices on your map will change from grey to white. TO
ADD ADDITIONAL
V ERTICES
ON A POLYGON :
1. While in Edit mode, select Edit Vertices from the “Map Edit” popup menu. 2. Place your cursor, between two vertices on the polygon, where you want to place
the new vertices. Press and hold the “+” key on your Number Keypad (note that, a plus sign (
) is added to your cursor).
3. While holding down the “+” key, use your mouse to select the location for the
new vertices. 4. Or, you can select the Add Vertices button on the Polygon Edit Bar. Your cursor
will change to a cross-hair and it will be linked to the polygon lines. Left-click to add new vertices to the polygon. TO
REMOVE VERTICES FROM A POLYGON :
1. While in Edit mode, select Edit Vertices from the “Map Edit” popup menu. 2. Place your cursor on the vertices you want removed. Press and hold the “-” key
on your Number Keypad (note that, a vertices selection box and a minus sign are added to your cursor). 3. While holding down the “-” key, use your mouse to select the vertices to be
removed. 4. Or, you can select the Delete Vertices button on the Polygon Edit Bar. Your
cursor will change (vertices selection box and a minus sign added). Left-click to delect vertices from the polygon.
Tutorial 5: Map Editing and CAD Tools 145
Using the Windows Clipboard with Maps in Oasis montaj The Windows clipboard can be used to move maps and map component objects from one map to another within Oasis montaj. In addition, you can use the clipboard to copy and paste objects between Oasis montaj and other applications. The Windows clipboard lets you perform the following tasks: • Copy text and graphics (as EMF objects) from Windows applications to Oasis montaj maps. • Copy map objects from Oasis montaj to the clipboard as EMF picture graphics and bitmaps. You can then paste these pictures into most word processing, presentation and graphic applications. • Copy objects from one map to the clipboard and paste these into another map. The objects can be pasted either as georeferenced information in an existing data view, or in a separate view centreed on the currently displayed window. How does the Windows Clipboard work? The Windows clipboard allows applications to perform two separate operations: 1. Information can be copied (or cut) to the clipboard. 2. Information on the clipboard can be pasted into an application document.
When information is copied to the clipboard, it can be placed on the clipboard in a variety of formats. When information on the clipboard is pasted into another application, that application will choose a format on the clipboard that it understands. For example, when text is copied to the clipboard from the Microsoft Word program, it is placed as raw ASCII text, a formatted EMF picture of the text, and a Word document that includes formatting information. When this information is pasted into a simple text editor, only the ASCII text can be used. When this information is pasted onto a PowerPoint slide, the text and formatting is used, and when pasted onto an Oasis Montaj map, the EMF picture is used. When information is copied from an Oasis Montaj map to the clipboard, the following will be placed on the clipboard: • A text block that contains geo-referencing information about the object. This includes the locations of the corners of the picture formed by the information and the map projection of the coordinate system. • A map view and its contained groups, or all map groups if nothing on the map was selected. If a map group was selected, only that group and the view that contained the group are placed on the clipboard. • An EMF picture of the map or view/group selected and clipped to the currently displayed window. • A bitmap of the map or view/group selected and clipped to the currently selected window.
146 Tutorial 5: Map Editing and CAD Tools
Copying Georeferenced information between Maps All data plotted in a map data view carry with it the geo-referencing information of the view. Georeference information includes the map coordinates of the data, a transform that translates the view coordinates to the map (paper) coordinates, and optionally a full map projection. When data is copied to the clipboard, all this information is included. If you use the paste georeferenced command to paste the clipboard information into a map view on another map, the geo-referencing information will be used to locate this information correctly in the new data view. If the new data view is in a projection different from the original data view, the data will be re-projected to the coordinate space of the new view. T O C OPY G EOREFERENCED O BJECTS (G ROUPS )
BETWEEN
M APS :
1. On the first map, select the entire map, a view or a group you want to copy. •
To select the entire map, make sure you are in the normal cursor tracing mode by clicking the Shadow Cursors button (
).
To select a view, click on the Map View Mode button . Then click on the click on the view you want to select. • To select a group, click on the Map Group Mode button , then choose the group. • To select a single entity within a group such as a single line or polygon, click on the Map Group Mode button . Then double-click on the group to change to the group edit mode (or select the group, right-mouse button, “Edit this group”). Once in group edit mode, select the entity you want to place on the clipboard. 2. Click the right mouse button. On the popup menu, click “Cut”, “Copy”, or “Copy map to clipboard” (if displayed), or (or press CTRL+C). •
3. Click on the map you want to paste the information into. 4. Click on the right-mouse button and select paste georeferenced. You will be
presented with a dialog that lets you choose the view that you want to paste the information into. Use the Clipboard to create a Montage Map or Poster At times, you may want to make a single map that contains separate data views from multiple map presentations. This is often called a montage. Each data view may show different data for the same map area. This can be done using the cut and paste feature of Oasis Montaj as follows: T O C REATE
A
M ONTAGE M AP
FROM COMPONENT MAPS
1. Create separate maps of all the different data sets that you want to show together
on your montage. 2. Create a new empty map that will be the montage. It is easiest to create this map
by duplicating an existing map without its contents. From the Map menu, select
Tutorial 5: Map Editing and CAD Tools 147
Duplicate map and specify a new map name and make the contents “blank”. The blank map that is created will be your montage map. 3. Go to a map that contains data and select the data by changing to the Map View
), then click on the view you want to select. Click the Mode mode (button right mouse button and choose “Copy” (or press CTRL+C). 4. Go to the montage map, click the right mouse button, on the menu click Paste.
On the dialog that is presented, choose the Same scale at offset option and specify a location at which to place the view on the montaj map. You can also simply move the view after pasting. 5. Repeat steps 3. and 4 for each data view to be placed on the montaj map.
When working with a montage map, you can also turn on the Map/Snap mode to limit the location of moved items to an even increment from the map origin. This helps you to exactly line up map views vertically and horizontally. Use the Map/Snap resolution option to specify the smallest increment to use for moving views. You might also choose to create your montage map from the entire contents of other maps, including their base views. To do this, choose Copy map to clipboard instead of “Copy” in step 3. In step 4, always choose to offset the location of the inserted views as required. This is because once inserted, only individual views can be selected and moved on the map and it is difficult to move all map views and keep the alignment between views. Using the Clipboard to paste a picture from another application on a Map You can use the clipboard to paste an image onto a map from another application that can copy Enhanced Metafile Format (EMF) or Bitmap information to the clipboard. For example, you might create marginal notes for your map in Word for Windows. This information can be selected and copied to the clipboard, where it will be in EMF format (among others). This information can then be pasted on your map, sized and located as you like. T O P ASTE
A
P ICTURE
FROM ANOTHER
A PPLICATION
TO A
M AP :
1. In the other program, select the graphical information and copy it to the clipboard
(in Word, just select the text, or in PowerPoint, select a slide or an object on a slide). 2. In Oasis montaj, select the map you want to paste the graphic into. 3. Click on the right-mouse button and select paste. You will be presented with a
dialog that lets you choose the view that you want to paste the information into
148 Tutorial 5: Map Editing and CAD Tools
Using the Clipboard to export a graphics from a Map to another application You can use the clipboard to copy maps, or parts of maps to other applications that can accept EMF or Bitmap graphics, or can understand Oasis Montaj map objects on the clipboard. For example, you map wish to place your data view and the images it contains on a PowerPoint slide, or add this as a figure in a Word for Windows document. T O P LACE
A
G RID I MAGE
ON A
P OWER P OINT S LIDE :
1. In Oasis montaj, display the grid in a data view and add whatever other graphics
you want to include. 2. Click the Map View Mode button (
) and choose the view you want to place in
PowerPoint. 3. Click on the right-mouse button and select “Copy” (or press Ctrl-Insert). 4. In PowerPoint, create a new slide, or open the slide to receive the picture. 5. In PowerPoint, on the Edit menu, click Paste Special. This will display a dialog
box enabling you to choose the format that you want to use to paste the image. Choose “Picture (Enhanced Metafile). Note: You can use the same procedure in almost any Microsoft application. Other applications that support pasting of Enhanced Metafile or Bitmap information will have a similar procedure.
Close and Save Project The next tutorial (Tutorial 6: Imaging and Dynamic Linking) is designed to introduce you to imaging and dynamic linking and we will be using the data and maps from Tutorial 4. Therefore, we need to close the current project. Closing a project will save all of your project databases, maps and profiles, plus information that tells the system whether you are working on a map or profile and the state in which you left it the last time you used it. T O C LOSE
A
P ROJECT
1. On the File menu, click Close|Project. The Save Modified Documents dialog box
is displayed. 2. Click the [All] button to save all open databases in your project. (Maps are always
saved when you close a project.)
Tutorial 6: Imaging and Dynamic Linking 149
Tutorial 6: Imaging and Dynamic Linking As described in Tutorial 3, the system provides a variety of capabilities for imaging and linking maps to data and profiles. This tutorial introduces you to these concepts. Before you begin… In this tutorial will be using the data and maps from Tutorial 4. Therefore, we need to open the GeoDemo project. T O O PEN
A
P ROJECT
1. On the File menu, select Project and then select Open. The Open Project dialog
box is displayed. 2. Select the GeoDemo.gpf file and click the [Open] button. The project is open
exactly as you left it.
Creating Colour Shaded Images The shaded relief image is a common method used to present geophysical and other types of data. This presentation technique creates a 3-dimensional effect using 2dimensional rendering or plotting capabilities. The result is useful for checking the quality of the data and for data interpretation. When you create a shaded relief map the system automatically creates a new grid file for that map with _s after the original grid name. For example, mag.grd will become mag_s.grd. Shaded relief maps can be created interactively using the Run Dynamic Shawdowing button ( ) in the Image Colour Tool, or manually by creating a shaded grid using the Grid and Image|Display|Colour-Shaded Grid. T O C REATE
A
C OLOUR S HADED I MAGE :
1. On the Grid and Image menu, select Display and then select Colour-Shaded Grid.
The system displays the Colour-shaded grid image dialog box.
150 Tutorial 6: Imaging and Dynamic Linking
2. Click the [Browse] button to select the Grid name (tfmag.grd). For the Shading
effect select Normal (RGB) from the drop down menu. Accept the default parameters for the Colour table, Colour method, Illumination inclination and Illumination declination. Note: The illumination inclination and illumination declination simply means the sun illumination angles. 3. Click the [New Map] button. The Map Exists dialog is displayed.
4. This is a safety feature built into the system to make sure that you that you do not
overwrite your tfmag.map. Click the [No] button so that you do not overwrite your current map. The system prompts you for a New map name.
5. Type the name of the new map as tfmag_shaded.map. Click the [OK] button.
The system will create a colour-shaded image from the grid file tfmag.grd and place the image in a new map window called tfmag_shaded.map.
Tutorial 6: Imaging and Dynamic Linking 151
Interactive Colour Imaging and Shadowing Oasis montaj provides an Image Colour tool that enables you to modify colour grid zoning interactively on the screen, store custom colour configurations in a specialized colour palette file and apply these to all of your grid image products. The system supports the following transform methods for zoning the data. • Linear - The system divides the range of grid values linearly into even increments. • Normal - The system assumes your grid data are normally distributed and determines zones based on the distribution for a standard bell curve. • Equal Area (Histogram) - The system evaluates your grid values and statistically determines the zones, such that each colour occupies an equal area of the map. T O A CTIVATE
THE I MAGE
C OLOUR T OOL :
1. Make sure tfmag_shaded.map is selected in your project. 2. Click the Map Group Mode button (
).
3. Since there is only a colour shaded image in this map and no other groups, click
on the map once with the left mouse button to have the system select the map. You will notice that the cursor has changed to show that it is in the Map Group Mode.
152 Tutorial 6: Imaging and Dynamic Linking
4. Right click while your have the grid selected and from the popup menu selct
Image Colout Tool. The Image Colour Tool dialog is displayed. This dialog shows the data distribution relative to the colour table (colour.tbl) selected earlier.
T O M ANIPULATE
THE
C OLOUR S PECTRUM / P ERCENTILE G ROUPS :
1. Press and hold your left mouse button on the left or right arrows at the top corners
of transform box. This will expand or contract your view of the transform in the window.
Tutorial 6: Imaging and Dynamic Linking 153 2. Click on the up or down arrows on the colour slide bar and notice how the colours
compress and stretch through the data range. The percentile value is displayed on the right-hand side of the colour tool bar. Also notice how the colour values change at the same time on your tfmag_shaded.map. Click the [Reset] button ( T O A CTIVATE
) to set the colours back to their original settings.
THE I NTERACTIVE
C OLOUR S HADING T OOL :
1. Ensure that the Image Colour Tool is still activated. 2. Select tfmag_s.grd as the image to be used by the Image Colour Tool from the
dropdown menu that displays the current grid name.
3. A new image transform is displayed for the tfmag_s.grd. 4. Click the [Dynamic shadowing] button (
). The system displays the Shadow
Tool dialog box.
5. Move the Shadow Tool dialog box so that it’s not blocking the map. 6. Click the [DynaShade] button. Your cursor will turn into a sun icon (
).
154 Tutorial 6: Imaging and Dynamic Linking 7. Use the sun cursor and click and hold the left mouse button on the image. As you
move your mouse around the image, the sun illumination will change relative to the centre of your map window. Note: The illumination is relative to the centre of the map window and not the centre of the image. 8. To save your new sun angles, release your mouse button and click the [Stop] button, then click the [OK] button. 9. The system returns you to the Image Colour Tool dialog box. 10. Click the [OK] button to save your changes.
Copying and/or Converting Grid Files Oasis montaj enables you to copy and/or convert any supported grid format to any other supported grid format. C OPYING
AND / OR
C ONVERTING G RID F ILES
1. On the Grid and Image menu, select Utilities|Copy/Convert. The Copy/convert
grids dialog is displayed. 2. Using the [Browse] button, select the Input Grid File, and specify the Output
Grid File. 3. Click the [OK] button. The grid is copied and/or converted as specified. Note:
For more information on copying and /or converting grid files, click the Help (
) button on the Copy/convert grids dialog box.
Using Dynamic Data Links Dynamic links are “virtual” georeferenced connections between spreadsheets, profiles and maps. These links work in two-directions so you can select any window and see the equivalent data in the other windows you are using. T O L INK S PREADSHEET , P ROFILE
AND
M AP D ATA:
Desktop linking enables you to place a special Link cursor on one or more maps and locate a specific part of the data. 1. Make sure only tfmag_shaded.map and the database tfmag.gdb are open in your
project (do not remove them from your project, just close the map, grid and database windows of the other items). 2. On the Window menu, click Tile Vertically. The system arranges your database
window and map window side by side. 3. The system automatically turns on a map link and activates the Shadow Cursors
button on the Map Editing toolbar. ( ). You can tell a button is activated because it will appear to be depressed more than the other buttons on the toolbar. 4. Click on a value in the database or on a point in the profile view, and you see that
the Link cursor (large black cross) moves to the same location on the map. This
Tutorial 6: Imaging and Dynamic Linking 155
type of linking enables you to quickly identify discrete anomalies on a map and view their corresponding values in the database. 5. You can display multiple maps and use this function to locate and visualize the
same anomaly locations for different data types. It is quite useful for quality control (searching for anomalous noise spikes, for example) and for multiparameter interpretation.
Dynamic Data Linking
Tutorial 7: Creating Custom Base Maps 157
Tutorial 7: Creating Custom Base Maps Many users have the need to create custom base maps based on corporate standards or client requirements. Custom base maps can be prepared using the commands available in the MAPPLOT GX. In this exercise, we will build a MAP using the control file, Map04.con, along with a few support files. T O C REATE
A
C USTOM B ASE M AP :
1. On the Map Tools menu, select Base map and then select Mapplot Control
File|From Control File. The MAPPLOT control file and load on current map dialog is displayed.
2. Click the [Browse] button and select the Control file name, (Map04.con). From
the Draw to dropdown list select a new map. We can leave the Match strings blank, for more information on match string, click the Help ( 3. Click the [OK] button and the New map dialog is displayed.
) button.
158 Tutorial 7: Creating Custom Base Maps 4. . Specify the New map name as (Map_04) and click the [OK] button. The new
map with the basemap based on the Mapplot control file (map04.con) is displayed.
5. The control file Map04.con is shown below. To view the control file, on the Edit
menu, select Edit a file. Click the [Browse] button to locate the control file. The four letter commands (for example, SURR) are all described in the help for the MAPPLOT GX. This file accesses several text files for legend information: survey.leg and mag.leg. It also places three images on the map: a Geosoft format grid file, map04mag.grd; a TIF file, omontaj.tif (Oasis montaj logo); and a JPG file, indexmap.jpg. MDFF map04.mdf DATT s1=kt100 DATT s2=kt200 DATT s3=kt500 DATT t1=kt100 DATT t2=kt200 DATT t3=kt300 MGRP Surround,0,0 SURR s3,0.15,s1 DATT s1
Tutorial 7: Creating Custom Base Maps 159 MGRP Coordinates,0,1 ANOY ,,,,,2000,0.15,,-1,-1,,,-0.15,,1 ANOX ,,,,,2000,0.15,,-1,,,,-0.15,,1 DATT refgrid=kt150 GRID 2 PROJ DATT GRID ALAT ALON
map.PRJ llgrid=kt050 -3,0.05,0.0230 ,,0.5,,,-1 ,,0.5
DATT RECT MGRP SCAL SCAL
s1 12 Scale_Bar,0,0 1,6,2,,ft,,,,1 1,6,3,,mt
MGRP North_Arrow,0,0 NARR 9,-6,-4,0.0,4,s2,80.3,23.4 MGRP Index_Map,0,0 RECT 3,-10,7,-2.65,15 TEXT 3,-9.8,7.2,-1,"Index Map - Topography" s1,,,,,TI RECT 3,-8,10,-6,13 s3 TEXT 3,-8.2,9.7,-1,"Survey Area" s1,,,,,TI MGRP Color_Bar,0,0 CBAR 6,-14,-8,1.2,0.6,s1 mag.agg,,,,-1 "Magnetics" "[nT]" DATT s1 MGRP Legends,0,0 TXTB 3,-6,20,0,,mag.leg s1 TXTB 3,-10,30,-1,,survey.leg s1 MGRP Titles,0,0 TITL 3,0,0,12 a,"Goldhunter",0,t2,.4 b,"Total Field Magnetics",0,t3,.3 b,"Northern Province",0,t2,.3 b,"Canada",0,t2,.3
160 Tutorial 7: Creating Custom Base Maps
MGRP AGGR
MGRP AGGR
MGRP AGGR
c,"Data collected by ",0,t1,.25 c,"Helicopter Magnetics System",0,t1,.25 c,"flown by",0,t1,.25 c,"Surveys 'R Us",0,t1,.25 d,"Gold Mapping Corp.",0,t2,.3,,,15 Mag,0,1 0 AGG_mag mag.grd,colour.tbl,3 Logo,0,0 2,-5,1,18,6,1 AGG_logo omontaj.tif(IMG;t=tif) IndexMap,0,0 3,-10,7,36,15,1 AGG_indexmap indexmap.jpg(IMG;t=jpg)
6. Open map04.con file in your text editor program (i.e. Notepad). 7. Experiment with the map04.con file. Adding a forward slash character “/” at the
start of a line changes the line to a comment. If a line has this type of character you can add any text for your informational purposes. Add a forward slash character “/” to the following lines at the end of the file. /MGRP IndexMap,0,0 /AGGR 3,-10,7,36,15,1 /
AGG_indexmap
/
indexmap.jpg(IMG;t=jpg)
8. Save the changes you made to the map04.con file as map04_no-index-map.con. 9. Create a new map using MAPPLOT, following the procedure in Step 1 above,
substituting map04_no-index-map.con for the control file name, and map04_noindex-map.map for the map name. The indexmap JPG image (brown topographic map) will be missing. 10. Try other modifications. Click the Help (
) button from the MAPPLOT control file and load on current map dialog box. You can add any commands found in the MAPPLOT GX to the control file.
Tutorial 8: Batch Processing with Scripts 161
Tutorial 8: Batch Processing with Scripts Scripting refers to the act of creating and running a file that will carry out many operations in a row. Oasis montaj Scripts are ASCII files that define a series of processing actions to be performed on selected data in a database. You can run scripts interactively in Oasis montaj using the script toolbar buttons Scripting commands found under the GX menu.
or the
We will create a script file using the script file record option. This operation writes a script file (*.GS) by recording each GX that you run during this session – until you stop script recording (from the GX menu). The resulting (*.GS) file contains sufficient parameter and database information to run the selected GXs in the same sequence. We will try this by recording a script of three different GXs - create a map using MAPPLOT, add line path, and add line profiles - then run the file. For more information on using Scripts, see the Creating Scripts In Oasis montaj Technical Note, available online at: www.geosoft.com/resources/technotes/ T O C REATE
A
S CRIPT F ILE :
1. On the GX menu, select Scripting |Record Script. The Create Script File dialog is
displayed.
2. Specify a File name (Script_map) and then click the [Save] button. 3. On the Map Tools menu, select Base Map|MAPPLOT control file and then select
From Control File. The MAPPLOT dialog is displayed.
162 Tutorial 8: Batch Processing with Scripts 4. Using the [Browse] button for the Control File Name parameter, select the
control file map04.con. Then, from the Draw to dropdown list, select a new map. 5. Click the [OK] button and the New map dialog will be displayed.
6. Specify a New map name as (Script_map), and click the [OK] button and the
new map (Script_map.map) will be created and displayed in your current project. 7. On the Map Tools menu, select Line Path. The system displays the Line path plot
dialog box. The default settings will be used for this tutorial. Click the [OK] button.
8. On the Map Tools menu, select Profile. The Profile plot dialog is displayed.
Tutorial 8: Batch Processing with Scripts 163
9. Specify magedited from the dropdown menu for the profile channel, 50 units/mm
for the profile scale and 5000 for the profile base. Specify blue from the dropdown menu for the line colour. Click the [OK] button. 10. On the GX menu, click Stop recording.... The system stops recording your
actions. All of your actions were recorded and saved to the script_map.gs file. 11. On the Edit menu, click Edit a File. The Edit file dialog is displayed.
12. Click the [Browse] button and select the file Script_map.gs as the File you wish
to open to view the Script parameters that you just created. Click the [OK] button and the system opens up the file in your default text editor. Below is the Script_map.GS file. The three GXs that were recorded are shown beside the GX command: MAPPNEW, PATH, and PROFILE. For information about the scripting commands, please use the Help system and look under script commands. /-------------------------------------------------------/ LOG OPENED : Wed Mar 17 00:55:00 2004
164 Tutorial 8: Batch Processing with Scripts /-------------------------------------------------------CURRENT Database,"D:\Tutorial\tfmag.gdb" CURRENT Map,"d:\tutorial\Map_04.map" SETINI MAPPLOT.CON=".\\map04.con" SETINI MAPPLOT.NEW="1" SETINI MAPPLOT.MS1="" SETINI MAPPLOT.MS2="" SETINI MAPPLOT.MS3="" SETINI MAPPLOT.MS4="" SETINI MAPPLOT.MS5="" SETINI MAPPLOT.MS6="" SETINI MAPPLOT.MS7="" SETINI MAPPLOT.MS8="" SETINI MAPPLOT.MS9="" SETINI MAPPLOT.MS10="" SETINI MAPPLOT.MAP=".\\Script_map.map" GX mapplot.gx CURRENT Database,"D:\Tutorial\tfmag.gdb" CURRENT Map,"d:\tutorial\Script_map.map" SETINI PATH.LINE_COLOR="K" SETINI PATH.LINE_THICKNESS="0.15" SETINI PATH.TICKFLAG="0" SETINI PATH.LABEL_FORMAT="TL" SETINI PATH.LABEL_DIR="0" SETINI PATH.LABEL_COMPASS="0" SETINI PATH.LABEL_LOCATION="1" SETINI PATH.LABEL_SIZE="2.5" SETINI PATH.LABEL_COLOR="K" SETINI PATH.LABEL_WEIGHT="0" SETINI PATH.H_OFFSET="2" SETINI PATH.V_OFFSET="0" SETINI PATH.GAP="0" GX path.gx CURRENT Database,"D:\Tutorial\tfmag.gdb" CURRENT Map,"d:\tutorial\Script_map.map" SETINI PROFILE.CHANNEL="magedited" SETINI PROFILE.SCALE="50" SETINI PROFILE.BASE="5000" SETINI PROFILE.LOG="0" SETINI PROFILE.LOGBASE="1.0" SETINI PROFILE.SMOOTH="0" SETINI PROFILE.COLOR="CM" SETINI PROFILE.THICKNESS="0.15" SETINI PROFILE.STYLE="0" SETINI PROFILE.PITCH="5" SETINI PROFILE.PFILCOL="N" SETINI PROFILE.NFILCOL="N" SETINI PROFILE.GAP="" SETINI PROFILE.JOIN="1" SETINI PROFILE.PLOTORDER="1"
Tutorial 8: Batch Processing with Scripts 165 GX profile.gx /------------------------------------------------------/ LOG CLOSED : Wed Mar 17 00:56:43 2004 /------------------------------------------------------13. The map script_map.map that was created in Step 2 is displayed showing the
custom base map, line path, and magedited profiles in the colour chosen. 14. Close script_map.map, as we will be re-creating it by running the script. 15. On the GX menu, click Run Script. The system displays the Run a script with
parameters dialog box.
16. Click the [Browse] button and select the Script file you wish to run
(Script_map.gs). Click the [OK] button. The system will begin to process the GS file containing the three GXs you recorded and display the map for you. 17. As an additional exercise, try modifying a parameter in the GS and run it again.
For example, in the editor change the parameter, PROFILE.COLOUR from “B” (blue) to “R” (red).
Tutorial 9: Advanced Mapping and Gridding 167
Tutorial 9: Advanced Mapping and Gridding As more information becomes available in digital format, earth science specialists are recognizing that it is essential to work with a variety of data from different sources. This approach not only spreads resources as far as possible but it also enables professionals to pool their knowledge and interpret results more effectively and make more informed decisions. In this tutorial, we investigate the integration of geochemical data in to an environment that has focused on a single type of data (i.e. geophysical) only.
Creating a Second Database in a Project We are going to create a second database, in the same project you have open now (GeoDemo.gpf), that contains geochemical data covering the same area as the magnetic data. T O C REATE
A
N EW D ATABASE :
1. On the Database menu, select New Database. The Create New Database dialog is
displayed. 2. Specify a New database name (geochem.gdb). Click the [OK] button. 3. The system creates a new database with the database name that you specified and
opens a Spreadsheet window with empty Channel Header and Data cells T O I MPORT D ATA I NTO A S ECOND D ATABASE : 1. On the Database menu, select Import and then click Geosoft XYZ. 2. The system displays the Import XYZ data dialog box.
3. Click the [Browse] button and select the geochem.xyz file located in your
Tutorial directory. Make sure the Import Template box is blank and click the [Template] button. 4. The system displays the Import dialog box with the name of the file you are
importing displayed along the dialog box title bar.
168 Tutorial 9: Advanced Mapping and Gridding
5. Highlight the Z1 channel, and in the Output Channel box change the Name from
Z1 to As. Repeat this procedure with the remaining Z* channels so that the channels have names as shown below.
Tutorial 9: Advanced Mapping and Gridding 169
6. Click the [OK] button to return to the Import XYZ data dialog box. A temporary
import template file (default.i0) is created with the settings you specified. Click the [OK] button to import the data.
7. An Import XYZ progress dialog box will be displayed on the screen while the
system imports the data into the database. The imported data should look like the picture below.
170 Tutorial 9: Advanced Mapping and Gridding
Processing Data in the Spreadsheet The following utilities allow the user to apply formulas and perform database operations between channels. In the following example, we will take the Log10 of the As channel and store the results in a new channel called LogAs. T O A PPLY
A
F ORMULA TO
THE
D ATABASE :
1. Select (highlight) the first empty channel header cell, then right click and from the
popup menu, select New. The Create Channel dialog is displayed.
Tutorial 9: Advanced Mapping and Gridding 171 2. Specify the Name for the channel as Log_As and then click the [OK] button. The
system creates a new channel in the database and displays it in the spreadsheet window. 3. Click three times on the Log_As channel header cell to highlight the entire
channel. 4. Press the [=] key from the keyboard to activate the formula bar at the bottom left
hand corner of your screen and type Log10 (As) then press the [Enter] key from the keyboard. 5. The system applies the formula to the channel as shown below.
6. On the Database menu, select Save Database Changes to save your changes. 7. The Save Changes dialog is displayed, click [Yes] to continue.
Plotting Symbols, Colour Bars and Legends Oasis montaj provides the ability to create a variety of symbol type plots of spatially located Earth Science data. This functionality is ideally suited to the presentation of data sets that are not line-oriented, such as geochemical survey results. The types of symbol plots available in the system include:
172 Tutorial 9: Advanced Mapping and Gridding
An effective method for geochemical data is to plot coloured symbols on a map. Oasis montaj enables you to create fixed size coloured symbols or symbols that are sized in proportion to the data values. Colours can be based on a variety of colour files, including zone (*.ZON) , aggregate (*.AGG) , table (*.TBL) or image transform (*.ITR) . Symbols can have different fill and edge colours. The fill and edge colours are independent, so they can be set to different values for different channels. C REATE
A
M AP
1. Select (highlight) the geochem.gdb. 2. On the Map Tools menu, select New map and then select New map from X,Y. 3. The system displays the Data range to map dialog box. Click the [Scan data]
button to have the system query the geochem database for the data ranges and report the Minimum X,Y and Maximum X,Y coordinates. 4. Click the [Next] button. The system displays the Create a New Map dialog box.
Enter a Map name (geochem.map) and from the Map Template dropdown list, select (Portrait A4). 5. Click the [Scale] button. The system automatically chooses a scale that will fit the
data on the map template. Just remember to round the scale to a more efficient number (e.g. 75000). 6. Click the [Finish] button to open a new blank map. Note:
If no scale is specified, a scale will be chosen which will fit all of the data within the chosen map sheet.
T O P LOT L OCATION P LOT S YMBOLS :
The most basic type of symbol plotting in Oasis montaj is to draw location plot symbols on a map for all data points in the database. 1. Select (highlight) the geochem.map. 2. On the Map Tools menu, select Symbols and then select Location Plot.
Tutorial 9: Advanced Mapping and Gridding 173 3. The system displays the Symbol plot dialog box. Specify the parameters for your
symbols as shown below. Click the [OK] button.
4. The system plots and displays the symbols on your map. T O P OST D ATA V ALUES
ON A
M AP :
Assay data values can be posted next to sample locations on your map. 1. On the Map Tools menu, select Posting. The Post data values on a map dialog is
displayed.
174 Tutorial 9: Advanced Mapping and Gridding
2. Specify the parameters for posting the data as shown above. Click the [OK]
button. The map is redrawn with the As assay values posted. Note: By defining different Posting locations, it is possible to post the values of numerous elements for each sample location (for example, Au, As, Cu, and Pb). T O P LOT P ROPORTIONAL S IZED S YMBOLS : 1. On the Map Tools menu, select Symbols, then select Proportional size. 2. The Proportional size symbols dialog is displayed.
Tutorial 9: Advanced Mapping and Gridding 175 3. Specify the Data channel you wish to process (As), as well as the rest of the
parameters as shown above. The symbol Scale factor value indicates how many data units are represented by a 1mm wide symbol. For example, if you specify that the scale is 1000 then a symbol, which has a data value of 20000, is plotted 20 mm wide. 4. Click the [Symbol] button and the Symbol Attributes dialog is displayed.
5. Select the Symbol as a (circle) and then select (check) the Fill box to enable the
Fill Colour box and select the colour as (red). When you are satisfied with your symbol attributes, click the [OK] button to close the dialog and then click the [OK] button again on the Proportional size symbols dialog to display the symbols on your map. Note: If you specify a base value, the value is subtracted from the data before calculating the symbol sizes. Any negative values that are left after subtracting the base are not plotted.
176 Tutorial 9: Advanced Mapping and Gridding
T O P LOT Z ONE C OLOURED S YMBOLS :
You may wish to create a new map (geochem2.map) at a scale of about 75000 at this point since the map above already has many symbols plotted on it. 1. On the Map Tools menu, select Symbols and then select Zone Coloured. The
Coloured symbols dialog is displayed.
Tutorial 9: Advanced Mapping and Gridding 177
2. Select As as the Data channel and specify the rest of the plotting parameters as
shown above. Click the [OK] button. The system displays the Colour Symbol Tool dialog box.
3. You can select the Log Distribution and if you are satisfied with the colour
distribution click the [OK] button. The system plots the zone coloured symbols on the map.
178 Tutorial 9: Advanced Mapping and Gridding
T O P LOT C OLOUR R ANGE S YMBOLS :
The Colour Range Symbols are the most flexible of the entire symbol tools collection. It allows for different ranges of data to be plotted using different symbols, colours and sizes. 1. Create a new map (geochem3.map) at a scale of 75000. 2. On the Map Tools menu, select Symbols and then select Colour Range Symbol. 3.
The system displays the Classified symbol plot dialog box.
Tutorial 9: Advanced Mapping and Gridding 179 4. Specify Au for the Classification channel box and the rest of the parameters as
shown above. Click the [Ranges] button. 5. The system displays the Specify Ranges dialog box.
6. Specify the extent of each range by entering the maximum value for each range as
shown above. Click the [Symbols] button. 7. The system displays the Specify Symbols dialog box.
8. Specify the desired symbol shape for each range. In this example, circles were
chosen for all of the ranges. 9. Click the [OK] button to return to the Specify Ranges dialog box, then click the
[Sizes] button.The system displays the Specify Sizes dialog box.
10. Specify the Symbol Size for each level.
180 Tutorial 9: Advanced Mapping and Gridding 11. Click the [OK] button to return to the Specify Ranges dialog box, then click the
[Colours] button. The system displays the Specify Fill Colours dialog box.
. 12. Choose the colours for the 5 levels and click the [OK] button to return to the
Specify Ranges dialog box. 13. Click the [OK] button to return to the Classified symbol plot dialog box. 14. Click the [Plot] button. The system plots the classified symbols for all 5 ranges
on the map. A close up picture of the range classified gold samples is shown below. The large yellow circles represent those samples that were greater than 100ppm.
This is a very useful tool. As an exercise, try using different symbols to classify the range of the Cu data.
Tutorial 9: Advanced Mapping and Gridding 181 T O P LOT L EGEND S YMBOLS :
When you use classified symbols, you will most likely create a legend showing the symbol colours and size ranges used on the map. 1. On the Map Tools menu, select Symbols and then select Colour Range Symbol
Legend. The Classified Symbol Legend dialog will be displayed.
2. Click the [Locate] button. The Locate Legend dialog is displayed. Click the [OK]
button and your mouse will turn into a crosshair. Position the cursor on the map where you want the lower left corner of the legend to be located and click left mouse button. 3. The system redisplays the Classified Symbol Legend dialog box with the X and Y
Positions of where the legend will be located.
4. Specify a Title for Legend Au (ppm) and click the [Plot] button. The system plots
the legend on the map.
182 Tutorial 9: Advanced Mapping and Gridding
Note 1: When you select this option, the system automatically records the colour, symbol and size settings you specified when creating the range classified symbols. This makes generating a legend easy. Note 2: This option is also used for plotting legends for the zoned colour symbols where a (*.ITR) file must be specified. A (*.ITR) file is created when the zoned colour symbols are plotted. The default name is the channel-name.itr, e.g. Au.itr.
Gridding Random Data The random gridding method (RANGRID GX) fits a minimum curvature surface to the data points. For details on minimum curvature gridding, refer to the Help system. T O P ERFORM M INIMUM C URVATURE G RIDDING : 1. Select the geochem.gdb database. 2. On the Grid and Image menu, select Gridding and then select Minimum
curvature. The Minimum Curvature Gridding dialog is displayed.
Tutorial 9: Advanced Mapping and Gridding 183 3. Using the Channel to grid drop down list, select (As) and then specify the Name
of new grid file (As.grd) and a Grid cell size of (50). For more information on the Advance gridding parameters, click the Help ( ) button. 4. Click the [OK] button. The system processes the data and creates the output grid file (As.grd). Note:
5.
Experiment with the data you have generated so far by creating a map displaying the As.grd grid you just created with proportional size symbols displayed as well. This map will allow you to compare two ways of processing your data and the validity of both. The following map shows an example of what such a map would look like.
Gridding Geochemical Data There are four potential methods to use for gridding data:
184 Tutorial 9: Advanced Mapping and Gridding 1. Bi-directional
Suitable for highly sampled data surveyed along regular lines. Can work well with potential field geophysical data. 2. Random
Suitable for randomly oriented data with a relatively large number of samples. Can work well with geochemical data from comprehensive regional and local surveys. 3. Kriging
Suitable for clustered data in which clusters are characterized by a relatively large number of samples and may be widely spaced. Can work well with geochemical data from stream sediment surveys and similarly sampled data. 4. Tinning
Suitable for randomly oriented data with a relatively large number of samples, or clustered data in which clusters are characterized by a relatively large number of samples and may be widely spaced. Can work well with geochemical data. Based on these very general criteria, random gridding and kriging are the optimal methods for statistical data such as that from geochemical surveys. Since geochemical data are statistical in nature and have a high range from sample to sample, it may also be appropriate to reduce the range of data through standard processing (i.e. application of a logarithmic transform). In this brief tutorial, we provide an overview of kriging and describe how to select an initial model (variogram, or more strictly, a semi-variogram) for creating a grid. Selecting a variogram model is the key to obtaining high-quality results – the actual gridding process is relatively routine. We also provide summaries of how to apply kriging in Oasis montaj and create a map of your final results. Kriging – Quick Overview This statistical gridding method uses the method of Kriging to determine a value at each grid node based on the located data you provide. A significant by-product of Kriging is the ability to estimate the error of the data at each grid node. In Kriging, the approach is to first calculate a variogram of the data, which shows the correlation of the data as a function of distance. Simply speaking, the further apart the data points become, the less correlation we expect between points. A variogram shows this phenomena for a given dataset, and based on the variogram, you are able to select a model that best defines the variance of the data. There are five types of variograms you can generate in the system, including: • Power • Sphere • Gaussian • Exponential • User-defined
Tutorial 9: Advanced Mapping and Gridding 185
The technique of Kriging uses the model you select to estimate the data values at the nodes of the grid. In geochemical applications, the sphere and gaussian model are typically most effective. The spherical model is mathematically simpler and we typically recommend this model as your starting point. Advanced users may want to experiment with gaussian and user-defined variogram models. Geosoft supports ordinary Kriging as well as universal Kriging. Universal Kriging differs from ordinary Kriging in that it allows the data to contain a regional trend. For a more in-depth understanding of geostatistical analysis and Kriging, refer to Mining Geostatistics written by A.G. Journel and C.J. Huijbregts, 1978. Importing Data for Kriging For the purpose of this tutorial, we provide a specific dataset called krigsample.csv. This dataset contains clustered data suitable for this method. T O I MPORT S AMPLE D ATA: 1. Create a new database and call it Kriging.gdb. 2. On the Database menu, select Import and then select Geosoft XYZ. The Import
XYZ data dialog is displayed.
3. Using the XYZ data file [Browse] button, locate the krigsample.xyz file. Accept
the default import template and import mode. 4. Click the [OK] button and the system imports the data into the database.
186 Tutorial 9: Advanced Mapping and Gridding
Calculating and Displaying a Variogram Model After importing data, the next step is to calculate a semi-variogram (referred to as a variogram for convenience in Geosoft). The variogram shows the correlation (semivariance) of the data as a function of the distance away from the sampling point. The further apart the data points become the less correlation we expect between points. In this tutorial, we will create a variogram to represent this correlation and then use it to determine the grid values. The normal procedure for creating a variogram is to: • Create a variogram file (*.var) of the channel you wish to display • Select a variogram model • Plot the variogram • Repeat this process for other models. In general, you must specify a geochemical data channel, output variogram file, log option, log minimum and variogram model. In addition, depending on the model you are using, you may have to set additional parameters as follows: Power
Specify a power value to use.
Spherical, Gaussian and Exponential
Specify the Range/Slope, Nugget and Sill.
User-defined
Specify an input grid containing your custom variogram model and select the User-defined Variogram model.
T O C ALCULATE
A
V ARIOGRAM M ODEL :
In this procedure, we will use the default model (linear) to simply generate a variogram of our data that we can then use to select the optimal variogram model and parameters.
Tutorial 9: Advanced Mapping and Gridding 187 1. On the Grid and Image menu, select Gridding and then select Kriging. The
Kriging dialog is displayed.
2. Complete the entries as shown above and then click the [Advanced>] button. The
Krigging – Advanced options dialog is displayed.
3. In the Name of output variogram file box, specify (Cu). We will leave the
remaining parameters to the defaults. 4. Click the [Variogram Only] button. The system creates a variogram and displays
it in a map in the current project.
188 Tutorial 9: Advanced Mapping and Gridding
In this example, we see a variogram based on the data with a linear model superimposed. The variogram shows the anticipated increase in variability as distance increases. At the right end, it may appear to decrease but this is usually the result of too few pairs for the statistics to be valid. Normally the variogram reaches a point (sill value) at which the semivariance plateaus. The corresponding h value is called the range value – beyond this distance there is no similarity in samples. We also see a plot of sample pairs. This latter plot shows how many sets of samples occur within specified distances of each other – this curve may help you to refine your variogram in the selection of the data points used to visualize your model curve. Here, most of the data occurs within 10 000 m and data beyond this point should not be given as high an emphasis when building your variogram. Selecting Variogram Model and Parameters Selecting a model and parameters is the toughest part of your kriging decision and requires considerable experience. Typically, you would use kriging to grid data within clusters accurately and then truncate the model between clusters so that clusters do not affect the gridding of neighbouring clusters. In this application, data integrity is maintained both within and between clusters and you can examine the error grid to verify that this effect is maintained. For a spherical model, typically you will have the following values: • Nugget (starting value): The nugget is the average error in each data point, and is indicated by the intersection of the variogram model with the h=0 axis. The default is 0 indicating that there are no repeated samples.
Tutorial 9: Advanced Mapping and Gridding 189
• •
Sill: This is the value corresponding to the point at which the variogram becomes uncorrelated and reaches its plateau point (or goes flat). Range/Slope: The range is the distance at which the variogram model reaches the sill value. Beyond the range, the data is uncorrelated. T O S ELECT
A
V ARIOGRAM M ODEL :
1. After displaying the starting linear model, evaluate the data and verify that the
spherical model is appropriate. 2. On the Grid and Image menu, select Gridding and then select Kriging. 3. The system displays the Kriging dialog box, click the [Advanced>] button and
specify the following settings on the dialog: • Select spherical for the Variogram model. • Specify a different Name of the output variogram file such as Cu_spherical.VAR. • Specify the Range/Slope value from inspection of the variogram and pairs graphs (4000) • Specify the Nugget value from inspection of the variogram and pairs graphs (0.06) • Specify the Sill value from inspection of the variogram and pairs graphs (0.16) 4. Click the [Variogram Only] button. The Cu_spherical_variogram.VAR is plotted and displayed in your current project.
5. You are now ready to grid the data using the model.
190 Tutorial 9: Advanced Mapping and Gridding T O G RID
THE
D ATA:
1. On the Grid and Image menu, select Gridding and then select Kriging. The
Kriging dialog is displayed.
2. Select the Cu Channel to grid and the Name of new grid file as Cu.grd. Click the
[Advanced>] button to display the Kriging – Advanced Options dialog.
3. The system displays the Kriging dialog box. Specify the information as shown
above and click the [
current project.
Tutorial 9: Advanced Mapping and Gridding 191
Plotting Krigrid Data As an exercise, try displaying your krigrid grid. The basic steps are as follows: 1. Create a new map 2. Display the grid 3. Display the variogram (using the Grid/Gridding/Plot Variogram menu option) 4. Display sample locations 5. Draw the Base map
Your completed map containing the Krigrid data should look something like this:
Tutorial 10: Advanced Imaging 193
Tutorial 10: Advanced Imaging It is often helpful for interpretation to combine multiple types of data together using special colour schemes. Two common methods of combining grid images are: • Using a grey-shade for one type of data, and full colour for another (for example, grey shaded topography with colour magnetics). • Using a ternary diagram presentation – three data grids using either a cyanmagenta-yellow (CMY) or red-green-blue (RGB) colour model (commonly used with airborne radiometric data). As we have seen previously, it is possible to create maps and add images to them, including single colour grid images, colour-shaded grid images, and JPG files. In addition, the system also supports a variety of advanced options that you can access via the Grid|Display Grid. Following are examples: G REY S HADED M AGNETICS
WITH
C OLOUR A U :
1. Open the geochem.gdb database and the tfmag.map map. (Note: if your
tfmag.map does not have all these groups (path, profile etc.) you will not need to hide them. However, if your tfmag.map does not have a base map add this now.) 2. Click the View/Group Manager button (
) and hide all Data groups except the
coordinates group.
. 3. On the Grid and Image menu, click Display grid and then click 2-grid composite. 4. The system displays the Display 2.grid composite on map dialog box. Specify the
parameters for the dialog box as shown below (if you do not already have an As.grd file, create one using minimum curvature gridding).
194 Tutorial 10: Advanced Imaging
5. Click the [Current Map] button. This procedure loads the grey-shaded image of
the total field magnetics, plus a colour image of the gold channel, As. The map appears as follows:
3-G RID T ERNARY P LOT : 1. Before you begin this tutorial, you must have grid files, (*.grd) for the Au, Cu
and Pb channels from the geochem.gdb database. If you have not already gridded this data please do so now using the minimum curvature gridding method.
Tutorial 10: Advanced Imaging 195 2. Open the geochem.gdb database and the tfmag.map map. Click the View/Group
Manager button (
) and hide all data groups except the coordinates group
3. On the Grid and Image menu, click Display grid and then click Ternary image. 4. The Ternary colour image dialog is displayed. Enter the parameters for this
dialog as shown below.
5. Click the [Current Map] button. The system processes and displays the ternary
image of the Pb-Au-Cu grids, using Red-Cyan for Pb, Green-Magenta for Au, and Blue-Yellow for Cu.
6. On the Grid and Image menu, click Display grid and then click Ternary legend.
196 Tutorial 10: Advanced Imaging 7. The system displays the Ternary Colour Legend dialog box. Enter the parameters
as shown below and click the [OK] button.
8. The system displays the Locate Legend dialog box. Click the [OK] button and
locate an area on the map to display the legend
9. The system creates and displays the ternary legend on you map.
Tutorial 11: Projections 197
Tutorial 11: Projections Oasis montaj features "smart projections" that reprojects data "on-the-fly" as it is displayed. This functionality enables maps to have several views; each containing a different set of projection coordinates. In addition, dynamic links between maps and data are maintained, even if different projections are used.
What is a map projection? A projection is a systematic construction of features on a plane surface (a map) that represents corresponding features on a spherical (or curved) surface (the earth). Projections include actual objects (highways, coastlines) as well as constructs (meridians, political boundaries). For more information on projections see the Appendix: Understanding Spheroids and Datums page 269. Parts of a map projection Understanding how projections work requires a basic knowledge of the different components. When working with projections, you should be familiar with some terms. The terms below represent different components of a projection: • Ellipsoid: A solid figure (shaped like an egg or oval) for which every vertical cross-section is an ellipse. • Spheroid: A spheroid is an oblate ellipsoid of revolution (basically an ellipsoid) that is used to model the surface of the earth for the purpose of making maps. • Datum: A reference value to which other measurements are referred. Also, an arbitrary reference level to which measurements are corrected. For example, a datum for elevation would be sea level. • Local Datum Transform: A datum adjusted for use in a specific location on the earth. Earth centre offset, rotation, scale factor relative to the WGS84 datum. • Projection Method: The mathematical algorithm used to transform points on a spheroid to their relative locations on a flat surface (i.e. Transverse Mercator, Lambert Conformal).
198 Tutorial 11: Projections
Understand Geosoft projections When dealing with map projections, it is important to be aware that the geographic map location (X,Y) of any objects are either an implied or a known map projection. If you do nothing to define map projections in your data, Oasis montaj will assume that all locations (X,Y) are in the same map projection, which is unknown. However, you must define map projections if you want to: • Annotate maps with longitude, latitude locations. • Convert the location of information (data or grids) from one map projection to another. • Display information on a map that is in a different map projection. • Defined a warped coordinate system to fit data to a desired map coordinate system. Note: If you do not need to do any of these things, you do not have to deal with map projections. For more information on projections see the Appendix: Understanding Spheroids and Datums page 269. In Oasis montaj, working with map projections requires that the map projection information be attached to coordinate information of a database, grid or map. Once you have attached a map projection to a set of coordinates, Oasis montaj will deal with any re-projections that may be required to properly display data together on maps. Map projections can be defined for any pair of channels in a database, for a grid coordinate system, and for a data view in a map. In most cases, all that is required is to define the map projection of the "X" and "Y" channels of an original database. This map projection will then be passed on to grids when data is gridded, and map views will inherit this projection when they are created. Map projections of data channels, grids and views can also be viewed and modified at any time, although the modification of map projections does require specific and accurate knowledge of the projection information.
Define a projection in Oasis montaj In Oasis montaj a projection is always attached or applied to something. This can be a coordinate pair on a database, a grid, or a map view. Before you can apply a projection, you will need to know the following information about your data. The type of projection coordinates that contain the location information for your data: For more information on projections see the Appendix: Understanding Spheroids and Datums page 269. • Projected (x,y) The coordinates are in a known projected coordinate system, such as UTM, or some other map-based projection. • Geographic (long,lat) The coordinates are longitudes and latitudes in degrees. Only a datum is required. • The coordinate subset to use (e.g. UTM, USA State Plane). • The units of measurement you want to use (e.g. feet, metres).
Tutorial 11: Projections 199
The Datum (or ellipsoid) to use (i.e. WGS 84 / UTM zone 44N) and local datum to use. Important Note: When you define (or modify) a projection the coordinates of the data (database, grid or map view) remain unchanged. This process only sets the “projection label”. However, when you reproject data into another coordinate system the numerical representation of the coordinates will change. •
Define X, Y channels Once your data has been successfully imported into Oasis montaj you can set the coordinate system and projection information for your database. One of the first steps in setting a projection is defining your X and Y channels. (This can be done during the import process, or will be automatically set if your coordinate channels are called X and Y by default.) Note that, you cannot create a map until your X and Y channels are defined. In Oasis montaj we have introduced "current" X and Y (and Z) channels. This feature enables users to select the channels that they would like to use as the current X and Y (and Z) channels (for example, East, North, and Relative Level). Markers have been added to the channel header to indicate which channels are currently defined to be the "current" X, Y (and Z) channels. The markers are little rectangles on the right side of the header cell, and contain "x", "y" (or "z") in reversed display (like the triangle protection symbol on the left). When you alter the current coordinate channels, these markers change too. Normally, users will just get "x" and "y", but if you have a "Z" channel it will get the "z". The "z" will be used in Wholeplot databases, where DH_EAST = "x", DH_NORTH = "y" and DH_RL = "z". Note:
All grids, maps, and databases derived from a database that has projection information attached to it, will also include the projection information. T O D EFINE X
AND
Y
CHANNELS :
1. When you first import your data, your X and Y coordinate channels may be called
East and North (or any other valid naming system). 2. To define X and Y channels select the Coordinates/Set Current X, Y, Z,
Coordinates menu item. The Set current X, Y channels dialog box is displayed.
200 Tutorial 11: Projections 3. Select your X and Y channels (in this example, you would select the East and
North channels) from the database, and click [OK]. 4. Your database now has set X and Y channels (titled East and North) which can be
seen by the inverse x and y on the right side of the channel header cell.
Set a projection to a coordinate pair in a database The Oasis montaj Coordinate System interface has been redesigned to make creating, editing or viewing projections a simple, one-step process. Oasis montaj uses a single dialog to set and modify projection settings. The Coordinate System tool also now supports ESRI projection files (PRJ). B EFORE
YOU BEGIN …
To define a projection, you must know the type of projection that is used for the data. If the wrong projection type is specified, Oasis montaj may return strange results or take an unusually long time to process the data. A projection can be defined from any pair of channels in a database. These two channels must contain coordinate information. Normally, the X and Y coordinate channels are used. Users can define projection from any of the following sources: a. Projected (x,y) b. Geographic (long,lat) c. No Projection d. Copy from channel e. Copy from a grid f. Geosoft PRJ file (projection file) g. ESRI projection files (PRJ). h. Geosoft warp file Setting a Projected (x,y) projection to a database You would use the Projected (x,y) projection if your database coordinates are in a known projected coordinate system, such as UTM, or some other map-based projection. T O S ET
A
P ROJECTED (X, Y) P ROJECTION
FOR
D ATABASE C HANNELS :
1. Open a Database (geochem.gdb) that contains at least two channels with
coordinate information (X, Y). 2. On the Coordinates menu, click Set Projection. The Georeference database
channels dialog is displayed.
Tutorial 11: Projections 201
3. Select the X and Y coordinate channels that you will use to set the projection, and
select Set as current X,Y? as Yes, then click the [Projection] button. The Coordinate System dialog is displayed. This dialog displays the current projection information for the database. If the database contains no projection information, the Unknown radio button is selected in the Coordinate System section of the dialog.
Whenever you work with projections in Oasis montaj, the projection information for the current database, grid, or view is displayed in this dialog. When the fields in the dialog are shaded grey, you can only view the information. If the dialog box fields are white, you may edit the values. 4. In the Coordinate System section of the dialog, select the coordinate reference system for the data. For example, if the data in your database is organized by X and Y locations, you would choose the Projected (x,y) option, however if the data in your database is organized by latitude, longitude locations, you would choose Geographic (long,lat). For more information on setting a Geographic (lat, Note:
202 Tutorial 11: Projections
long) projection see the following topic; To set a Geographic (long,lat) Projection for a Database page 206. 5. The Coordinate System section also includes a [Copy from] button that displays
the Copy Coordinate System From dialog.
6. Use this dialog to copy a coordinate system from another file. The file types
supported include, Database, Grid, Geosoft Voxel, Geosoft projection (*.prj), ESRI projection (*.prj), Geosoft warp (*.wrp), Geosoft polygon (*.ply) and GMSYS model. 7. In our case, as our data is organized by X, Y locations we will select the
(Projected (x,y)) radio button to set the projection reference system. The appropriate dialog parameters will become enabled.
Tutorial 11: Projections 203 8. Using the dropdown lists you can select the Datum, Local datum transform and
Projection method. Note that, the Local datum transform dropdown list provides all the local datum transforms, which apply to the selected Datum. 9. For our tutorial data, select the following coordinate system parameters:
Datum: NAD 27 Local datum transform: [NAD 27] (8m) Cnaada (Northwest Territories; Nunavut; Saskatchewan Projection Method: Alaska CS27 zone 7 Note:
If the projection method you want to use does not exist, but you know the parameters for it, you can click the Projection method dropdown menu ( ), which along with displaying the Projection method information includes a [New] button that displayes the New Projection Method dialog.
Use this dialog to create a new (custom) projection method. 10. Your Coordiante System dialog should now look like the following:
204 Tutorial 11: Projections
11. You will note that the Length units have been set to match the units used by the
projection, in our case (US survey foot) and should not usually be changed. 12. You can use the dropdown menus (
) to display the detailed information for each of the coordinate system parameters, as shown below:
Tutorial 11: Projections 205
13. If all the projection settings are correct, click [OK] to apply the projection.
206 Tutorial 11: Projections
Setting a Geographic (long, lat) projection to a database You would use a Geographic (long, lat) projection if your database coordinates are in longitudes and latitudes degrees and only a datum is required. Important Note: When you select a “Geographic (long,lat)” projection the geographic coordinates will be displayed as a Cartesian system with units of degrees. This means that you will not be able to display latitude and longitude annotations in the base map because the X, Y coordinate system of the map will be represented by the long, lat coordinates. TO
SET A
G EOGRAPHIC (L ONG , L AT ) P ROJECTION
FOR A
D ATABASE :
1. Open a Database that contains at least two channels with geographic coordinate
information (long, lat). For example, create a new database (projtest.gdb) and then import the XYZ data (projtest.xyz). Using the Edit Channel dialog rename the East and North channels to Longitude and Latitude, remembering to specify the display Format as (Geographic), as shown below:
If your Longitude, Latitude channels display double astricks (**), that only indicates that the channels are too narrow to display the data. Widen the channels and the data will be properly displayed. 2. On the Coordinates menu, click Set Projection. The system displays the Georeference database channels dialog box.
Note:
Tutorial 11: Projections 207
3. Select the X and Y coordinate channels that you will use to set the projection
(Note that, in this case the selected X, Y coordinate pair are called Longitude and Latitude) and then click the [Projection] button. The Coordinate System dialog is displayed.
Whenever you work with projections in Oasis montaj, the projection information for the current database, grid, or view is displayed in a dialog box similar to the one above. When the fields in any dialog box are shaded grey, you can only view the information. If the dialog box fields are white, you may edit the values. 4. Using the Coordinate system radio buttons, select the coordinate reference system for the data. For example, if the data in your database is organized by latitude and longitude locations, you would choose the Geographic (long,lat) option, however if the data in your database is organized by X, Y, you would choose Projected (x,y). For more information on setting a Projected (x, y) projection see the topic; To set a Projected (x, y) Projection for a Database page 200. Note:
208 Tutorial 11: Projections 5. In this case, as our data is organized by Longitude, Latitude locations and we will
select the (Geographic (long,lat)) radio button to set the projection reference system. The appropriate dialog parameters will become enabled.
6. Using the dropdown lists you can select the Datum and Local datum transform.
Note that, the Local datum transform dropdown list provides all the local datum transforms, which apply to the selected Datum. 7. For our tutorial data, select the following coordinate system parameters:
Datum: NAD 27 Local datum transform: [NAD 27] (8m) Cnaada (Northwest Territories; Nunavut; Saskatchewan 8. Your Coordiante System dialog should now look like the following:
Tutorial 11: Projections 209
9. You will note that the Length units have been set to match the units used by the
projection, in our case (degree POSC) and can not be changed. 10. You can use the dropdown menus (
) to display the detailed information for each of the coordinate system parameters, as shown below:
210 Tutorial 11: Projections
11. If all the projection settings are correct, click [OK] to apply the projection.
Define the map projection of a grid When you create a grid from a database that already has location (coordinate) channels with a defined projection, the projection information in the database is automatically applied to the grid. Note: To ensure consistency between your databases and grids it is good practice to define a projection in your database before creating grids from it. T O M ODIFY
OR
D EFINE
THE
M AP P ROJECTION
OF A
G RID :
1. On the Grid and Image menu, select Properties. The Grid Properties dialog is
displayed.
Tutorial 11: Projections 211
2. Using the Browse (
) button, locate the grid you want to modify. Click the [Next>] button to display the Grid Properties dialog. This dialog reports all of the basic information about the selected grid.
3. Click the [Modify] button to display the Modify Grid Properties dialog. This
dialog displays the information that is used to locate the grid in a real coordinate system. Note that, changing anything in this dialog will have the effect of moving or changing the apparent size of the grid when displayed on a map.
212 Tutorial 11: Projections
4. Click the [CoordSys] button to modify (or define) the map coordinate system of
the grid file. 5. The Coordiante System dialog is displayed. This dialog displays the current
projection information for the grid. As this grid has no projection information set, the Unknown radio button is selected.
6. Whenever you work with projections in Oasis montaj, the projection information
for the current database, grid, or view is displayed in this dialog box. When the
Tutorial 11: Projections 213
fields in any dialog box are shaded grey, you can only view the information. If the dialog box fields are white, you may edit the values. 7. Using the Coordinate system radio buttons, select the coordinate reference system
for the data. In this case, as the data in our grid is organized by Longitude, Latitude locations we will select the (Geographic (long,lat)) radio button to set the projection reference system. The appropriate dialog parameters will become enabled.
8. Using the dropdown lists you can select the Datum and Local datum transform.
Note that, the Local datum transform dropdown list provides all the local datum transforms, which apply to the selected Datum. 9. For our tutorial data, select the following coordinate system parameters:
Datum: NAD 27 Local datum transform: [NAD 27] (8m) Cnaada (Northwest Territories; Nunavut; Saskatchewan 10. Your Coordiante System dialog should look like the dialog above. 11. . You will note that the Length units have been set to match the units used by the
projection, in our case (degree POSC) and can not be changed. 12. You can use the dropdown menus (
) to display the detailed information for each of the coordinate system parameters, as shown below:
214 Tutorial 11: Projections
13. If all the projection settings are correct, click [OK] and the Modify Grid
Properties dialog will again be displayed. Click the [OK] button to apply the changes to the grid file and the Grid Properties dialog will be displayed. Click the [Exit] button to close the dialog.
Defining the map projection of a map view In Oasis montaj maps have several views that contain information about the map. Projection information for a map is contained in a data view. Base map information is contained in the base map view. There are two choices available when you create a new map, from X, Y or from latitude-longitude coordinates. When you create a new map the system either reads the manually entered coordinates, or scans a user’s specified database or grid file and attaches their projection and coordinate attributes to the specified map view.
Tutorial 11: Projections 215 Note:
The projected base map created from a latitude-longitude range will be windowed based on lines of latitude and longitude, not X and Y, and the data window will be oriented so that North is up at the centre of the map.
Create a new map from X, Y coordinates Use the New map from x,y menu item to create a new blank map to fit the data range specified. The data range can be entered manually, or it can be determined from the range of selected data in a database or from a grid range. T O D EFINE
A
M AP P ROJECTION
FOR A
N EW M AP
FROM
X,Y
1. The first step is to create a new map using the projection coordinates from an
existing database or grid. On the Map Tools menu, select New Map|New map from x,y. The Data range to map dialog will be displayed.
2. This dialog shows the data range (coordinate), units and projection information
from the last projection that was used. To change the projection information, you will need to scan an existing database or grid for the projection and coordinate information. To scan a database for the data range and projection information: a. Click the [Scan Data] button. b. The system will scan the current database open in your project. c. The system will re-display the Data Range to Map dialog box showing the new data range, coordinate information and projection information obtained from the database. To scan a grid for the data range and projection information: a. Click the [Scan Grid] button. b. The system will prompt you to specify a grid file that contains projection information. c. Select a grid file, and click [OK].
216 Tutorial 11: Projections
d. The system will display the Data Range to Map dialog box showing the new data range, coordinate information and projection information obtained from the grid. 3. Click the [Projection] button to view the projection information. The Coordinate
System dialog is displayed. This dialog will display the known projection information as defined in the scanned database or grid file. The example below shows the projection information for a map containing no projection information.
Whenever you work with projections in Oasis montaj, the projection information for the current database, grid, or view is displayed in the Coordinate System dialog. When the fields in any dialog box are shaded grey, you can only view the information. If the dialog box fields are white, you may edit the values. 4. For information on defining a projection using the Coordinate System dialog go to Step 4 of the Setting a Projected (x,y) Projection on page 200. Note:
5. Once the projection has been defined, the Coordinates System dialog will display
the projection information. Note to display the Datum, Local datum transform and Projection method details, as shown below, click the dropdown menus (
).
Tutorial 11: Projections 217
6. If all the projection settings are correct, click [OK] to apply the projection and the
Data range to map dialog will again be displayed.
218 Tutorial 11: Projections
7. Click the [Next>] button to continue. The Create a New Map dialog box will be
displayed.
8. Specify a Map name for the new map. You can also select a Map template to use
for your map layout. To automatically calculate the map scale, click the [Scale] button. 9. The default scale that will fit the defined data range to the specified template will
be displayed. You can modify this value to a more appropriate scale (e.g. 60000). 10. Click the [Finish] button when you are done. The system will create a new
(blank) map with projection information in the Data View. New map from Latitude – Longitude coordinates To create a new map from Latitude-Longitude requires a database that has a Projected (x,y) coordinate system. When using latitude-longitude degrees as the coordinates of your data and/or a geographic projection you need to use New map from x,y menu item The resulting map will have latitude and longitude displayed in a right angled Cartesian coordinate system. Note that, with a Projected (x,y) coordinate system, you can display Latitude and Longitude annotations on the basemap of a new map created from x,y coordinates.
Tutorial 11: Projections 219 T O D EFINE
A
M AP P ROJECTION
FOR A
N EW M AP
FROM LAT / LONG :
1. The first step is to create a new map using the projection coordinates from an
existing database or grid. On the Map Tools menu, select New Map|New map from lat,long. The Data range to map dialog will be displayed.
2. This dialog shows the data range (coordinates), units, and projection information
from the current (selected) database in your project. To change the projection information, click the [Projection] button and the Coordinate System dialog will be displayed. To scan a database for the data range and projection information: a. Click the [Scan Data] button. b. The system will scan the current database open in your project. c. The system will re-display the Data Range to Map dialog box showing the new data range, coordinate information and projection information obtained from the database. To scan a grid for the data range and projection information: a. Click the [Scan Grid] button. b. The system will prompt you to specify a grid file that contains projection information. c. Select a grid file, and click [OK]. d. The system will display the Data Range to Map dialog box showing the new data range, coordinate information and projection information obtained from the grid. Note: After creating a map from Longitude/Latitude the data view of the new map will have a warp attached to it. This is because when we create a Longitude/Latitude map we warp the view so that North is at the top and centred. If you remove the warp on your map, new elements may not be positioned correctly.
220 Tutorial 11: Projections
Displaying data with different projections on a map Since grids, images, data and maps can have different projection information, you may want to display one or more types of projections on a map. The following is a list of data types that you can attach projection information to and place on a map: • • • • • • •
A grid or image Located data ArcGIS LYR ArcView SHP MapInfo data Vector files such as DXFs etc
When displaying different projections on a map: 1. Identify the projection for each data type (i.e. grids, images, maps, or located data). Data types with different projections can be placed on the same map. However, make sure the data cover the same geographical area. 2. Data that is imported into a map is re-projected into the map projection when it is displayed. For example, if you place a grid with latitude/longitude projection coordinates on a map defined in UTM coordinates, the system will display the grid on the map in the map’s projection while preserving the grid’s projection information. In this example, the lat/long meridians on the grid would appear curved, while the UTM meridians would appear straight.
Applying a warp to a grid Warping is useful when you have an un-referenced grid file in an unknown coordinate system or an un-referenced image. •
To relocate data, define one control point.
•
To scale and rotate data, define two points.
•
To scale in X and Y and rotate, define 3 control points.
•
To perform a quadrilateral warp, define 4 control points.
T O D EFINE
A
W ARP :
1. On the Coordinates menu, select Georeferencing|Define a Warp. The Warp file
Creation dialog is displayed.
Tutorial 11: Projections 221
2. Specify an Output Warp file name (.wrp) and from the dropdown lists select the
Warp type and Definition Mode. Note that, the 4-point warp requires the points are in a clockwise order. The multi-point warp (more than 4 points) is best for small translations relative to the units of distance on the map. Note: The Semi interactive mode is a good method, it enables you to select the points on the map that you are warping from (for example, the corners of a bitmap) and then manually input the points (in UTMs) that you are translating to. If you find that you cannot accurately select these points, try the other modes (interactive and manual) to enter the four points. Remember, that you can use the right mouse menu to zoom, shrink, and pan around the map while you are selecting the points. 3. Click the [OK] button. The Map projection dialog is displayed, asking if you want to “Define the output coordinate projection”.
4. At this stage, you can define the coordinate system of the map, for the purposes of
this tutorial, we will click [No] button to continue applying the warp. The Define Warp control points dialog is displayed.
5. This dialog tells you to click on the point location for each point in your warp file,
and then specify the new “warped” location in the following dialog. Click the [OK] button to continue.
222 Tutorial 11: Projections
6. The cursor will change to a crosshair (
) enabling you to locate the first point. Once you have located the first point, the Assign new coordinate 1 of 4 dialog(s) will be displayed.
7. Specify the New X Y coordinates and click the [Next>] button to specify the next
coordinate point location. Continue this until you have specified the 4 coordinates. Note: Temporary circles will be placed on the locations that you select with the crosshair cursor. These circles will be removed once all of the control points have been set and the warp control file has been created. 8. To apply the warp to the grid, on the Coordinates menu, select Georeferencing|Warp a grid. The Warp a grid dialog is displayed.
9. Using the dropdown list, select the Grid file to warp. Using the Browse () button,
locate the Warp definition file (.wrp) from your project directory and then specify a New warped grid file. Click the [Next>] button to continue. The New warped grid dialog is displayed.
Tutorial 11: Projections 223
10. If all of the parameters are correct, click the [Finish] button to warp the specified
grid file. Warping image files If you want to warp an image file (i.e. tiff, bmp) and the file is large, you may only want to attach the warp to the file. "Attaching" the warp is suitable if you have a very large file that is stored on a CD, for instance. The warp process is repeated every time you display the file to a projected map but the original file remains unchanged. When you warp an image, the warped output image must be a Geosoft COLOR grid (*.grd) File type in order to keep the colours of the original image. If the image of the new warped grid appears twisted or is an incorrect size, check the warp points are in a circular order and the points are correctly located within the defined map area. Converting Elevations The Geoid height menu option enables you to convert GPS elevations to elevations relative to the geoid. Geoid height (GEOID GX) will create a channel of the geoid height relative to the GRS 80 spheroid for a given pair of coordinate channels. This GX requires a grid of the geoid model, which is the elevation of the geoid in metres relative to the GRS 80 spheroid, which is found in the Oasis montaj/etc directory. For more information, see the GEOID GX help topic.
224 Tutorial 11: Projections
Tutorial 11: Projections 225
Projection concepts and FAQs A "Datum" defines the earth model used to represent the "Geoid", which is effectively the surface that would be defined by the sea level throughout an area being mapped. At this point, we should all understand that the "geoid" undulates according to the gravitational field; hence, it cannot be defined perfectly by a simple mathematical expression. The business of cartography is to map features that exist on a local geoid to a flat piece of paper. Q 1.) How do we get from a geoid to a map? A 1.) The first step is the "datum". The datum consists of an ellipsoid, a prime meridian, and a specific part of the earth for which the datum applies. The datum ellipsoid is a perfect mathematical surface that best approximates the shape of the earth over the area of a datum. Latitude, longitude locations on a datum is the closest match of the geoid location to the datum ellipsoid surface. For example, latitude, longitude coordinates on the NAD27 datum use the Clarke 1866 ellipsoid with Greenwich as the prime meridian. One should note that the mapping of the geoid shape to the ellipsoid is not perfect because of the afore-mentioned imperfections in the geoid. At this point, it is worth pointing out that many datums share the same ellipsoid. The difference between them is that a specific datum only applies to a specific area of the earth, and the geoid of that area is implied by the datum name. For example, "Luzon 1911", "Mound Dillon" and "NAD27" are all datums based on the "Clarke 1866" ellipsoid, but are used to map the geoid from the Philippines, the island of Tobago, and the North (and central) America respectively. Once we have a longitude, latitude on a specific datum, it is the job of a map projection to convert the latitude, longitude of the round earth to a Cartesian X,Y coordinate for a flat piece of paper. The next piece of the puzzle is to understand why we need a refinement of the datum into what Geosoft calls "local datums". The advent of GPS and satellite mapping required the definition of a single datum that best approximates the entire earth. After a bit of evolution, we have settled on WGS 84, which is truly a "perfect" datum that represents an exact ellipsoid, and the centre of that ellipsoid is at the gravitational centre of the earth. A fundamental problem in modern cartography is how to convert a latitude, longitude on the WGS 84 datum to, say, NAD27 so that a location can be used on NAD27 maps, or vice versa. Because datums like NAD27 represent a geoid, and WGS represents a perfect ellipsoid, we need a way to convert the imperfect geoid shape of NAD27 to the perfect WGS27. The best way to do this is to measure the difference between known latitude, longitude locations on the NAD27 datum and the WGS84 location that one receives from a GPS measurement. This has been done throughout Canada to produce the NTv2 model of NAD27, and throughout the United States to produce the NADCON model. This process is also being carried out at continental scale in other parts of the world. Both NTv2 and NADCON are implemented as gridded corrections
226 Tutorial 11: Projections
models, that given a location, one can look up the correction (both are supported in Geosoft). A second way to make the correction is to force the surface of the WGS 84 ellipsoid to lie as closely as possible to the surface of the datum ellipsoid (which in turn approximates the geoid), such that a simple mathematical conversion is within acceptable accuracy. This can be done by adjusting the location of the centre of the earth of the datum ellipsoid relative to WGS84, which is the basis of the Molodenski and Bursa Wolf corrections (parameters are in datumtrf.csv). However, such simple conversions are only accurate over a relatively small part of the datum, depending, of course, on the complexity of the geoid of that datum. For datums that cover a large region, such as NAD27, one needs many different adjustments depending on which part of the NAD27 datum you are on. For example, the very large area approximations such as "MEAN Canada" are much less accurate in the Yukon than "Canada (Yukon)". Both are less accurate than the NTv2 correction lookup. Q 2.) When I buy a topographic map of Canada (of say B.C.) it says it uses the NAD27 ellipsoid. It doesn't say what local transformation it uses? A 2.) First, NAD27 is a datum, not an ellipsoid, and the NAD27 datum uses the Clarke 1866 ellipsoid. You must choose which local datum transform is most appropriate for your needs. We would recommend always selecting the local transform that is most specific to your area, in this case "[NAD27] Canada Alberta; British Columbia". You could also choose "[NAD27] Canada NTv2 (20 min)" if the highest accuracy is required, but this is slower and more demanding of system resources. In our "Datum" list, we also include the names of all the common earth ellipsoids (with a "*" prefix). This is because practitioners have commonly confused ellipsoids with datums, and one often only knows the ellipsoid. By including the ellipsoid names in the list, we make life a bit easier for you when you receive a map and the information that it is "Clarke 1850, UTM 42S". However, if you need to do a local datum transform, you must determine (or guess) at the real datum name, which is also why we list the local transforms by area of use. Q 3.) I found where the ldatum.csv file calls the datum for say [NAD 27] Canada (Ont.&Man.) but couldn't find the call to the appropriate datum for [NAD27] Canada (BC/AB). Did I just not look hard enough? A 3.) Yes, these transforms are in the tables. When maintaining the tables, we load the tables into Excel and use the Data/Sort function to sort by datum or area of use (or any column) to help find things. The ldatum.csv file is used only by the projection wizard to provide a list of the available projections by datum and by area of use. This file refers to the actual local datum transform name and parameters in “datumtrf.csv”. Note that, the tables are only used to construct the projection information the first time something requires a projection. Once constructed, the parameters become part of the object in question, and changing the tables later has no effect. You can find more information on how the tables are constructed and related in the Coordinate System help.
Tutorial 12: Database Maintenance Utilities 227
Tutorial 12: Database Maintenance Utilities There are a number of utilities available for data maintenance. These are available to allow the user to check the status of the database, generally in a troubleshooting or preventative maintenance role. The following is a list of the data maintenance utilities: • Database details • Verify database • Defragment database • Grow database • Repair database
Checking Database Details From time-to-time, you may want to examine the database details. T O C HECK D ETAILS
OF A
D ATABASE :
1. Select the geochem.gdb database. 2. On the Data menu, click Maintenance and then click Details. 3. The system displays the About Database dialog box.
4. We are mostly concerned with whether we are close to exceeding the limits of our
Elements (Groups or Lines, Channels, Blobs, Block Size, Compression and File
228 Tutorial 12: Database Maintenance Utilities
Size). Another area of concern is what the Statistics show us. Statistics let us know at a glance how large the GDB is and whether the space is being used efficiently. If the Unused or lost space seemed excessive (say greater than 20%) we might consider Defragmenting the database (to follow). For more information about these statistics please refer to the Help System. 5. Click the [OK] button to close.
Defragmenting the Database As you work with data in the database, new and modified data are saved to the end of the database file and to space freed within the database before the last time you saved the project. As the database grows you can lose space due to fragmentation or from simply erasing data. T O D EFRAGMENT Y OUR D ATABASE 1. Make sure you have backed-up the database before packing. 2. On the Data menu, click Maintenance and then click Defragment. The system
removes all unused space by repacking the data as efficiently as possible and reduces the database file (*.GDB) size by the amount of freed space.
Growing, Verifying or Repairing your Database: If you find that the original size limits that were selected for your database (lines/groups and channels/fields), were too small, you can increase these limits using the Grow command. If you wish to check the integrity of your database, you use the Verify command. If your database has been corrupted (for example, if the computer failed during a Defragment operation) you can run the Repair utility to try to recover some or all of the data. For each of these three commands, please refer to the detailed explanations in the Online Help System.
Adding Database Comments Comments about your data can be added to the comment block of a database. Comments are useful as a place to hold information about the data collection procedures, instrumentation and surveyors used, any specific problems and the solutions to them, and other bits of information that may have formerly been kept as field notes, readme files, or other notes. The comment block is an RTF file that can be edited with the Windows Wordpad application, or another text editor. T O A DD C OMMENTS
TO
Y OUR D ATABASE :
1. On the Data menu, click Database comments. This launches your editor and
opens the file _dbcmnt.RTF which is stored in your database. Edit this file however you wish, adding text, pictures, etc. When you are done editing, close the editor. You will be prompted to save the file. Click the [Yes] button.
Tutorial 12: Database Maintenance Utilities 229 2. On the Data menu, click Database comments again. You will see the comments
that you entered at Step 1.
230 Tutorial 13: Exporting and Printing Maps
Tutorial 13: Exporting and Printing Maps The Oasis montaj Mapping and Processing System provides the ability to export interim processed data to another systems for additional manipulation or to a GIS system for creating final map products and integrating with other sources of data. Required tools for exporting data to Geosoft XYZ and other formats are also provided. Oasis montaj uses your installed Windows system drivers to create printer or plotter output. Depending on your installed driver, you may find it does not produce the highest quality output or that it takes a long time to produce a plot. Geosoft provides a special printer configuration capability that enables you to initalize an internal raster engine that performs most of the print/plot processing and passes it to the driver for final output. If you are not satisfied with your driver's performance, you can try selecting this option. Normally, with high-quality drivers, you should not have to use this option but it can help with problem drivers or PostScript printing.
Exporting Maps to a File Geosoft recognizes the need for the ability to move data, grids and images easily to other software systems. Supported export formats for maps include: Enhanced Metafile ArcView Shapefile CGM Plot Bitmap PCX PNG Encapsulated Post Script TIFF Compressed Geosoft COLOUR Grid ER Mapper RGB ER Mapper ECW Compressor
MapInfo TAB Geosoft Plot file DXF AutoCAD DXF AutoCAD v12 JPEG JPEG High Quality TIFF GeoTIFF MapInfo TIFF ArcView TIFF
For more information on exporting data, refer to the Exporting and Archiving topic in the Oasis montaj Online Help system. T O E XPORT M APS
TO A
F ILE :
1. Select an open map in your project. 2. On the Map menu, click Export. The Export Map dialog is displayed.
Tutorial 13: Exporting and Printing Maps 231
3. Specify the Region to Export (Viewed Region, Full Map or Selection). 4. Select the Output Format, the Image Resolution and where to Export the map to
(File or Clipboard). 5. Using the Options dropsown list, select (Cluster Dither, Error Diffusion or No
Dither). 6. Click the [OK] button. If you selected to export to a file the system will display
the Exported file name dialog box. Specify a name for the file and click the [Save] button. 7. The system exports the map. T O E XPORT
TO
GIS, S PREADSHEET
AND
D ATABASE A PPLICATIONS :
1. On the Data menu, click Export and then click the Geosoft XYZ. The system
displays the Export XYZ data dialog box.
2. Specify the XYZ data file to export as Geoexport and click the [Template]
button. The Export XYZ Template dialog box is displayed.
232 Tutorial 13: Exporting and Printing Maps
3. All of the channels automatically included to be exported. If you wish to remove
certain channels from the export process highlight the channels in the Channel box and click the [Remove] button. Click the [OK] button to once you have selected the data you wish to export. The system will return you to the Export XYZ data dialog box. Click the [OK] button again and the system exports the data. Note: The Include Comment Header option is not default, but may contain important information that pertains to the database you are exporting. The Include Dummies option allows you to omit dummy values when exporting.
Printing Maps By default, the system is set up to use your current Windows driver. When you start printing maps for the first time, you will most likely accept the defaults. Depending on your driver’s performance however, you may want to add a new configuration that uses a more advanced printing option, such as Geosoft bands, Geosoft bands and dither, or HP-RTL. Refer to the on-line help system for a complete discussion on the pros and cons of the different printing modes. Printer and Page Setup For optimal printing, you may have to experiment with printer settings and properties. Different drivers allow different selections (paper size, orientation, dithering patterns and colour controls). However, they can be very slow especially for large plots.
Tutorial 13: Exporting and Printing Maps 233 T O C ONFIGURE
YOUR
P RINTER
AND
P AGE ::
1. Make sure your GeoDemo.gpf project is open. 2. On the File menu, click Printer and Page Setup. The Page Setup dialog is
displayed.
3. Use this dialog to specify your page setup, i.e. Paper Size, Paper Source,
Orientation (Portrait or Landscape), and Margins. 4. Click the [Printer] button to configure your printer settings.
234 Tutorial 13: Exporting and Printing Maps 5. Use this dialog to select your printer and to modify your printer properties. Click
the [OK] button twice to exit these dialogs. Change or Add New Printer Configuration Use the Change Printer Configuration/Add Printer Configuration dialog(s) to change the configuration of your printing mode, colour scaling and other print options. T O A DD
A
N EW P RINTER C ONFIGURATION :
1. On the Print dialog, click the [Add Config] button. The Add Printer
Configuration dialog is displayed.
2. If you want to use Windows drivers for printing make sure Windows is selected
for the Print Mode. 3. If you are having problems with your Windows drivers and want to optimize your
printing speed, select the Geosoft bands or Geosoft bands and dither Print Mode. 4. Select the Geosoft HP-RTL device if you have this type of printing device. 5. If you want to adjust the Colour Scaling, change the CYMK colour values. 6. If you want to adjust the Image print resolution change the default dpi value. 7. Click the [OK] button and the system will save your new configurations and
initializes it for use. Note: To change your printer configurations click the [Change Config] button from the Printer Setup dialog box.
Tutorial 13: Exporting and Printing Maps 235
Print Preview Use the Print Preview dialog to display the active map, as it would appear when printed. T O P REVIEW
A
M AP B EFORE P RINTING :
1. On the File menu, click Print preview. The Print preview dialog is displayed.
2. From this dialog you can specify the Region to Plot, the Plot Scale, Overlap and
Layout of the file you wish to print. Click the [Preview] button. The system displays a preview of how your map will look when printed on paper. 3. Click the [Print] button if the map is ready for printing or click the [Close] button
to return to the Print Preview dialog box. Print a Map Use the Print dialog to specify how you want your print job to appear and to send a job to the printer. T O P RINT
A
M AP :
1. Select (highlight) the map that you would like to print. 2. On the File menu, click Print. The Print dialog is displayed.
236 Tutorial 13: Exporting and Printing Maps
3. Specify the Region you want to print (current Viewed Area or the Entire Map). 4. Specify the Plot Scale. To maintain the map scale, select the Use Scale Factor
option and specify a value, (1 = 100 per cent). If you use this option, the map may require more than one page depending on the media to which you are printing or plotting. 5. If the plot is being Panelled, specify either the All panels option or the Range of
panels option to print. If you are printing multiple panels, you can specify an overlap in mm. This helps you to match panels later. 6. Specify the number of Copies to be printed. 7. If required, select the Print to File option box and specify a filename. 8. Select the Centre on Page option box to centre the plot on the page. To centre the
plot on a paper roll select the Fit On Roll option box. 9. To move the map from its origin (lower left corner of page or plot), specify an
offset distance in mm. 10. Click the [Print] button to send the map or plot to the currently configured printer
or plotter. Printing in Batch For high efficiency automated printing and plotting, Geosoft provides a batch printing capability. This capability allows a number of plots to be printed sequentially without any hands-on intervention.
Tutorial 13: Exporting and Printing Maps 237 T O P RINT
IN
B ATCH :
1. On the File menu, click the Batch printing. The Print Multiple Maps dialog is
displayed.
2. In the Maps to Print box, specify the maps you want to print. To specify more
than one map, map names should be separated by a ‘|’ (vertical bar) character. You can also select multiple files by clicking the [Browse] button. In the Maps to Print dialog box press and hold the [Ctrl] key and while clicking the left mouse button to select the maps you wish to print. 3. Specify the other parameters as required. For more information about Batch printing options click the Help (
) button.
4. Click the [OK] button. The system sends the maps to the installed printer or
plotter.
Tutorial 14: 3D Views in Oasis montaj 239
Tutorial 14: 3D Views in Oasis montaj Oasis montaj 3D views are a representation of a 3D drawing space on a standard Geosoft map. The 3D capabilities enable you to display multiple surfaces, each with its own relief and contents, and each with its own orientation in 3D space. To create 3D views requires the licensed processing engine, but 3D views on an existing map can be viewed and manipulated in the Oasis montaj free Viewer. Geosoft Maps use Views to organize and display information. Most Geosoft maps contain both a Base view and a Data view, but some maps may have more views for different purposes. Views contain Groups, and these groups in turn contain drawing elements. All Groups within a 2D View are drawn in the coordinate system of that View. The Base view uses coordinates in millimetres relative to the final printed paper, and the Data view uses a coordinate system that can represent a projected or geographic coordinate system on the earth, or simply an arbitrary X, Y Cartesian coordinate system. 2D Views contain one flat drawing surface, which is defined by the View’s coordinate system. A 3D View can be created from an existing 2D View or Group already displayed on a map, or directly from a grid file. Specialized GX’s may also create 3D views for their own purposes. Like 2D Views, a 3D view also represents coordinates, but in this case in X, Y AND Z. 3D Views may contain Voxel (3D Grids) and any number of drawing planes. Any Group or drawing object that can be drawn on a 2D View can be drawn on a Plane in a 3D View. Each plane in a 3D view can be oriented independently in the 3D coordinate system. A Plane in a 3D view can be flat or it can have a surface relief defined by a grid file. Planes will normally share the X, Y coordinates of the 3D view, and flat planes will have a constant Z value representing the vertical location of the plane. However, a plane coordinate system may be oriented in any direction in the 3D space for special applications. If a plane does have a relief View, the axis of the relief is always in the Z direction of the plane. 3D views appear on a 2D map as a standard view, except that what you see is the 3D representation of the view from a fixed viewing location. You can manipulate a 3D view using the 3D Viewer. To do this, select the 3D view (Note, you must be in Map View Mode menu.
to select a view), right click and select 3D Viewer from the popup
When viewing the 3D view in the 3D Viewer, you can change the orientation of the View relative to your point of view by rotating the coordinate system horizontally and vertically, and you can zoom and pan into the view, and you can modify certain display parameters such as delete planes, and adjust plane transparency using the 3D Tool. The 3D Tool enables you to modify the 3D parameters, display characteristics and the appearance of your 3D view in the 3D Viewer. The 3D Tool is available in the Tools section of the Project Explorer and will appear whenever a 3D Viewer is
240 Tutorial 14: 3D Views in Oasis montaj
open. If more than one 3D Viewer is open, the parameters of the 3D Tool will represent whichever Viewer currently has focus. When you close the 3D Viewer window, the 3D View will be drawn on the 2D Map as it last appeared in the 3D Viewer. Create a 3D View from an Existing Map View or Group Any map object that can be drawn in a 2D View can be drawn on a plane in a 3D View. This includes images and drawn or vector features as well as directly from a Grid file that can be used to represent the surface of a plane in a 3D view. TO
CREATE A
3D V IEW
FROM EXISTING
V IEWS
OR
G ROUPS
ON A MAP :
1. Open a map that contains a dat view, in our case we opened the As.grd.map.
Click the Map View Mode (
) button so you are in View mode.
2. With the mouse cursor over the map window, right-click and select Create a 3D
View. The Create a new 3D View dialog will be displayed. This dialog will enable you to create a new 3D View on a map or add a new drawing plane to an existing 3D View (Note that, 3D Views can contain any number of drawing planes).
3. Specify the New 3D View name (3D_View), and the Name of new plane in 3D
View (As). Note:
It is extremely important that when you create a new 3D view that you create a new name for the view rather than selecting a name from the dropdown list. The dropdown list is presented to enable you to see what view names you may already have. Do not overwrite one of the existing 2D views, unless you want to replace it.
4. In the Plane elevation box you can specify the plane elevation (or constant offset
from the 3D origin in the direction normal to the new plane coordinate system). We will leave this to the default, as (0). 5. Using the Browse (
) button for Relief surface grid (optional), locate the grid to be used as the relief surface of the 3D View. In this case, we are using the (As.grd) file.
Tutorial 14: 3D Views in Oasis montaj 241 6. Click the [OK] button and the Surface relief grid dialog will be displayed.
7. Click the [Default] button to display the grid scaling parameters and clip-limits
calculated from the relief grid. The default Relief base and the Vertical scale are determined from the relief grid for aesthetic purposes. For more information about these parameters, or any dialog parameter, click the Help (
) button.
8. Click the [OK] button to plot the 3D view to the current map and open the 3D
Tool and 3D Viewer. You will notice that your 3D View and 3D plane appears empty, you now must add a map View or Group to the plane. 9. To add a View or a Group to the new 3D plane, with the mouse cursor over the
3D Viewer window, right-click and select Draw a View/Group on a Plane. The Draw a view or group on a plane in a 3D view dialog will be displayed.
10. This dialog enables you to select the View or View/Group to add to the 3D plane.
In our example we can select the grid or symbols to plot. We selected the grid (Data\Grid) and to Draw on plane (As). Click the [OK] button and the selected grid will be plotted to the 3D plane.
242 Tutorial 14: 3D Views in Oasis montaj
11. Using the 3D Tools in the 3D Viewer window, orient the view to the desired
perspective and when you are satisfied with the orientation close the 3D Viewer. 12. The 3D view is placed in the center of the current map. Using the standard 2D
map tools, you can move and size the 3D view into the desirable position on the map.
Tutorial 14: 3D Views in Oasis montaj 243
Create a 3D View from an Existing Grid File A 3D View of a grid can be plotted either to a new map or in the centre of a current map. TO
CREATE A
3D V IEW
FROM A
G RID :
1. On the 3D Tools menu, select Display|Relief Surface to New or Current Map. The
3D Surfaces from a grid dialog is displayed.
244 Tutorial 14: 3D Views in Oasis montaj
2. You can select different grids for the Surface relief and Colour image grids, or as
shown above, you can select the same grid file for both so that the colour surface will coincide with the relief surface. 3. From the New or current map dropdown list select (new). The remaining
parameters can be left the the defaults, click the [Next>] button to display the Surface Grid dialog.
4. To calculate the Surface grid statistics, click the [Defaults] button. This surface
grid information may be modified here or you can do it later from within the 3D Tool. Click the [Finish] button and the Data range to map dialog is displayed.
Tutorial 14: 3D Views in Oasis montaj 245
5. Use this dialog to create a new blank map to fit the data range specified. The data
range can be entered manually, or it can be determined from the range of selected data in a database or from a grid range.For our map, we will select the [Scan grid] button, which displays the Get a range from a grid file dialog.
6. Use the dropdown list to select the grid file (tfmag.grd) and click the [OK]
button to return to the Data range to map dialog. Click the [Next>] button to continue and the Create a new map dialog is displayed.
7. Use this dialog to specify the Map name (3D_tfmag.map), Map template
(portrait letter). To calculate the Scale based on the data range and the map template, click the [Scale] button. You can modify the map scale to a more useable value, as shown above. 8. Click the [Finish] button to plot the 3D View to a new map. Note that, the 3D
Tool and 3D Viewer are now open in the foreground of your project. The 3D Viewer enables you to change the point of view and work with all the attributes
246 Tutorial 14: 3D Views in Oasis montaj
that make up the 3D View by using the controls in the 3D Tool. When you close the 3D Viewer, the view will appear on the 2D map just as it last appeared in the 3D Viewer.
Add a Plane to an Existing 3D View You can add any number of new drawing planes to an existing 3D view. Anything that can be drawn on a 2D view can be drawn on a plane in a 3D view. In the next example, we will create a new plane that will include symbol Assay data draped on an Assay grid that will appear in a plane coincident to the magnetic plane. TO
ADD A NEW PLANE TO A
3D V IEW :
1. Select the 3D View in the (3D_tfmag_shaded.map) map; make sure you are in
View mode by selecting the Map View Mode (
) button.
2. Right click and from the popup menu select Add a new drawing plane. The Add a
new drawing plane to a 3D view dialog will be displayed.
Tutorial 14: 3D Views in Oasis montaj 247
3. Enter the Name of new plane in 3D view as (As) (Note: if you enter the name of
an existing plane, that plane will be replaced) and specify the relief grid as (As.grd). 4. Click the [OK] button and the Surface relief grid dialog will be displayed.
5. Click the [Default] button to display the grid scaling parameters and clip-limits
calculated from the relief grid. The default Relief base and the Vertical scale are determined from the relief grid for aesthetic purposes. For more information about these parameters, or any dialog parameter, click the Help (
) button.
6. Click the [OK] button to create the empty plane in the 3D view. The new plane
will be invisible because we have not yet drawn anything on it. 7. The new plane in the 3D View is now the default drawing plane, so anything we
now draw using the standard Oasis montaj drawing tools will appear on this new plane. Note: Note that you can control the vertical position of the plane either by specifying the plane elevation for flat planes or the Relief base if a relief View is specified.
248 Tutorial 14: 3D Views in Oasis montaj
Draw a group directly onto a plane in an existing 3D View You can draw groups including grids, images, contours, and symbols to a plane in a 3D view just like drawing to a 2D view. After creating a 3D view, it becomes your Default Drawing View so that the next group you plot will be drawn on the Default Drawing Plane which is the most recent plane in the view unless set otherwise by the user. You can also use the clipboard to cut/copy groups from other maps to the default drawing plane of a 3D view. TO
MAKE A PLANE THE DEFAULT DRAWING PLANE :
1. Select the 3D View in an open map, make sure you are in View mode by selecting
the Map View Mode (
) button.
2. Right click and from the popup menu select Set default drawing plane. 3. If the 3D View contains more than one plane, the Set a default drawing plane in a
3D View dialog will be displayed. 4. From the Default drawing plane dropdown list, select a plane (As) from the view. 5. Click the [OK] button and the selected plane will now be the default drawing
plane. Note: You can also change the default drawing view from the “Map Tools” menu 6. Open the (As.grd.map) created in an earlier tutorial and then click the View/Group Manager Tool button ( ). Select the symbol group (PSYMB_geochem_As) and then while holding your cursor over the selected group in the map (As.grd.map) right click and from the opup menu, slect Copy. 7. Then, select the map (tfmag_shaded.map) again, the default drawing plane (As)
should still be selected, and while holding your cursor over the selected 3D view, right click and from the popup menu, select Paste. The As symbols will be copied to the default drawing plane in your 3D view.
Tutorial 14: 3D Views in Oasis montaj 249
To Plot 3D Colour Range Symbols Oasis montaj provides a range of options for visualizing your data in three dimensions including; displaying multiple surfaces, each with own relief and contents, and each with its own orientation in 3D space. The 3D colour range symbol plotting option enables you to plot 3D symbols with fixed or variable colours to a 3D map. The colours can be varied based on the values from another data channel. This example uses the sample data (geochem.gdb) found in the \Geosoft\Oasis montaj\data\various directory. T O P LOT 3D C OLOUR R ANGE S YMBOLS : 1. Open the database that includes the data you want to plot using the 3D colour
range symbol option. 2. On the Map Tools menu, select Symbols|3D Colour Range Symbols. The 3D
Coloured symbols plot dialog is displayed.
250 Tutorial 14: 3D Views in Oasis montaj
3. Using thedrpdown lists, select the parameters that best suites your data. Note that,
if you want to colour your data using the values from a secondary channel, select (Variable colour) from the Colour option. Click the [OK] button and the Data range to map dialog is displayed.
4. Click the [Scan data] button to scan your current database. Click the
[Projection] button to set the coordinate system. For for information on these or any dialog parameters, click the Help ( ) button. Click the [Next>] button and the Create a new map dialog is displayed.
Tutorial 14: 3D Views in Oasis montaj 251
5. Specify a new Map name and then from the Map template dropdown list, select a
template. 6. Click the [Scale] button to calculate and display a default scale that will fit the
defined data range to the specified template. You can edit this scale to a more usable value. Click the finish button and the 3D Controls dialog is displayed.
7. You can edit the 3D Controls parameters now, during the creation of the 3D
colour range symbol plot, or from within the 3D Viewer while linked to the 3D Tool in real-time so that changes are displayed interactively. 8. Click the [OK] button to plot the 3D colour range symbols to a map. Note that,
the 3D Tool and 3D Viewer are now open in the foreground of your project. The 3D Viewer enables you to change the point of view and work with all the attributes that make up the 3D View by using the controls in the 3D Tool. When you close the 3D Viewer, the view will appear on the 2D map just as it last appeared in the 3D Viewer.
252 Tutorial 14: 3D Views in Oasis montaj
Notes about 3D Views 3D Views are rendered coarsely when interactively changing the orientation or point of view. When you release the mouse in any of these modes, the objects will be refined in a way that is optimum for the given point of view. The time it takes to refine the picture depends on processor speed, your 3D Graphics capabilities, the complexity of the 3D model being drawn (number of planes, number of groups, relief resolution, etc.), and the amount of RAM on your system. If a plane has a relief View, the groups drawn on the plane will only appear where the relief View is defined. Groups drawn on flat planes (those without relief Views) will be drawn to the extents of the group. 3D Views may have clipping areas just like 2D Views. In 3D, the clip area is applied vertically relative to the X, Y coordinate of each plane.
Displaying a Voxel in a 3D View Use the 3D Tools|Display|Voxel menu option to place a Voxel in a 3D View. A "voxel" is just another word for a 3 dimensional grid. You can create a Voxel using the Voxel Gridding option on the 3D Tools|Gridding menu (see page 114, for more information on creating a Voxel). T O D ISPLAY
A
V OXEL
IN A
3D V IEW :
1. On the 3D Tools menu, select Display|Voxel. The Place a Voxel in a 3D View
dialog is displayed.
Tutorial 14: 3D Views in Oasis montaj 253
2. Using the Browse (
) button, select the Voxel file, included with the tutorial data files, copied to your project directory as (Tutorial_Assay_As.geosoft_voxel).
3. Select the Display as (New map) and then leaving the remaining parameters to
the intelligent defaults, click the [OK] button. 4. The Voxel file is displayed on a new map (Tutorial_Assay_As.map) and the 3D
Viewer and 3D Tool are displayed in the foreground of your project. The 3D Viewer enables you to change the point of view and work with all the attributes that make up the 3D View by using the controls in the 3D Tool. When you close the 3D Viewer, the Voxel will appear on the 2D map just as it last appeared in the 3D Viewer. Plotting Voxel Isosurface (Contour) Use the 3D Tools|Utilities|Create Isosurface from Voxel menu option to extract an isosurface from a voxel model and plot it to a map. T O P LOT V OXEL I SOSURFACE
TO A
3D M AP :
1. Make sure the Voxel map file (Tutorial_Assay_As.map) created in the previous
step is open. Then, while in Map View Mode ( to display the 3D Viewer and the 3D Tool.
), double-click the “3D Voxel”
2. On the 3D Tools menu, select Utilities|Create Isosurface from Voxel. The Plot
Voxel Isosurface dialog is displayed.
254 Tutorial 14: 3D Views in Oasis montaj
3. The Voxel file by default should display the currently open Voxel as
(Tutorial_Assay_As.geosoft_voxel). 4. For the Surface value, specify the value for the Isosurface (this is the "contour"
value) as (10). Then, click in the Colour box to display the Color Tool, select a suitable colour for the Isosurface. Then, using the Display dropdown list, select to plot the Isosurface to (Current map). 5. Click the [OK] button and the Isosurface will be plotted to your current 3D View. Note:
For a better view the Isosurface, move the Transparency slider, on the Voxel Tab in the 3D Tool, to the left until you can see both the Isosurface and the Voxel.
6. Repeat the steps 2 to 5 above, adding Surface values (contour levels) to best
display your data. 7. The 3D Voxel map shown below has had Isosurfaces plotted at 10, 20 and 30.
Tutorial 14: 3D Views in Oasis montaj 255
3D Tool and 3D Viewer The 3D Tool enables you to modify the appearance of your 3D View in the 3D Viewer. The 3D Tool is available in the Tools section of the Project Explorer and will appear whenever a 3D Viewer is open. If more than one 3D Viewer is open, the parameters of the 3D Tool will represent whichever Viewer currently has focus. Note: For more detailed information on the 3D Tool, select (highlight) the 3D Tool, and press the F1 key, or use the Search tab in the Oasis montaj help system to locate the 3D Tool help topic(s).
256 Tutorial 14: 3D Views in Oasis montaj
The following interactive viewing buttons are provided along the top of all of the 3D Tool tabs: Rotate Mode - enables you to rotate the displayed View 360 degrees in all
directions. Note that, users that have a mouse wheel can zoom in and out while rotating the View, by turning the wheel. Zoom Mode - enables you to zoom in and out of the displayed View. Note
that you can also move the model closer and farther in any mode using the roller on your mouse (if you have one). Pan Mode - enables you to move the entire displayed View. Centre Map in Window - resets the focus point of the view and the current
3D View is centred in the 3D Viewer (independent of the zoom). Toggle Redraw On/Off - enables the auto-redraw to refresh/redraw a map
automatically after changes are made to it. Force Redraw of 3D window - forces the refresh/redraw of the 3D View in
the 3D Viewer. Display Tab tab enables you to modify the overall display of the 3D view. This tab The controls the overall orientation, distance, visibility and presentation of the 3D view. The Inclination, Declination and Distance are the current viewing parameters, relative to the central point. Inclination and declination can be fixed, so when
Tutorial 14: 3D Views in Oasis montaj 257
rotating, that particular angle will always be used (e.g. fixing inclination at 25 degrees will only allow a rotating view around the central point where the point of view is locked at 25 degrees above the horizon). The Slider bar controls the brightness of the 3D view image. The button displays the Axis Options dialog. Use this dialog to specify the background colour of your 3D view, add a box around the 3D view and add an axis with annotations for the X, Y and Z axis with whatever nomenclature you wish to use. For clarity, we entered; Easting, Northing and Depth for this tutorial. The button displays the Rendering Options dialog. Use this dialog to set the rendering resolution and scale for your 3D View. Rendering occurs every time you modify the 3D view and the view is redrawn, Resolution occurs when the image is constantly in motion; for example while rotating, zooming or panning and Scale is relative to each other, the default is 1:1:1. For users with graphics cards that are of low memory (below 64Mb) and/or slower processors, then it is recommended to leave these at the default settings while working in the 3D environment as it makes heavy use of the resources in the video card. Note:
The controls on this dialog are system controls and changes made to this dialog will affect all 3D maps in your Oasis montaj system.
For more detailed information on using the Display Tab options, see the online Help topic, Modify Display Options (3D Tool) Plane Tab The tab enables you to modify the individual planes within each 3D View. This tab controls the display and viewing characteristics of surfaces and images displayed in the 3D Viewer. All the planes in the 3D view are listed in the drop down box; in the example in this tutorial the three gridded image of Au are listed as planes (225RL,275RL and 325RL) and the topography that we draped the magnetic image over is listed as surface (by default). If the Plane is a “flat” surface, i.e. the image is not draped over a topographic relief surface, only the Offset and the Transparency can be controlled. If the Plane has a topographic surface (i.e. has X, Y and “depth” components) there are additional controls: Sample – the sampling resolution of the relief surface grid (16 to 512, 256 is the default) Base – the base value of the grid relative to the Z-axis. Zero (0) implies that the relief surface’s Z values are relative to the Z-axis.
258 Tutorial 14: 3D Views in Oasis montaj
Scale – the vertical exaggeration of the relief surface. A scale of 1 indicates that the relief surface is to true scale. Clip min and max – minimum and maximum values in the relief grid. These can be set to clip higher or lower values in a surface. For more detailed information on using the Plane Tab options, see the online Help topic, Modify Plane Options (3D Tool) Voxel Tab The tab enables you to modify the appearance of the Voxel in your 3D view. For example, you can select the Voxel to modify from the Voxel dropdown list, and then select (check ) to add a Box around the Voxel or to display a voxel Mesh. The
button displays the Color Symbol Tool, which can be used to modify
button displays the Voxel Statistics dialog, the colour of the voxel. The which provides the statistics for the currently selected voxel. The Clip Data slider bar (or the text boxes) can be used to modify the displayed data range. Use the Transparency slider (or text box) to modify the transparency of the selected Voxel. The Clip Axis slider bars (or text boxes) can be used to modify the ranges for the X, Y and Z coordinates of the Voxel. For more detailed information on using the Voxel Tab options, see the online Help topic, Modify Voxel Options (3D Tool) Surfaces Tab The tab enables you to modify the appearance of a 3D surface extracted from a Voxel grid to a 3D View. For example, you can select the 3D surface (Isosurface) to modify from the Isosurface dropdown list, and then click inside the Colour box to specify the background colour of the 3D View. The Transparency of the Isosurface can be adjusted interactively by moving the slider on the Transparency bar or by specifying a value in the Transparency text box. Using the Clip Axis you can clip each of the 3D Axis (X, Y and Z) independently. The Clip Axis can be modified interactively by moving the individual sliders or by specifying an Axis range in the data boxes provided. For more detailed information on using the Surfaces Tab options, see the online Help topic, Modify Surfaces Options (3D Tool). 3D Rendering Memory Requirements You can adjust the rendering resolution for 3D Views by clicking the button on the Display Tab. The controls on this dialog are system controls and changes made to this tab will affect all 3D maps in your Oasis Montaj system.
Tutorial 14: 3D Views in Oasis montaj 259
The 3D Views rendering process makes heavy use of the available memory on your video card, and performance will be substantially reduced if your limits are exceeded. Full render resolution: When the full render resolution is set to maximum it can easily consume hundreds of megabytes of memory (200-600 Mb). If you do not have adequate memory available your computer will start to thrash, your hard drive light will turn on and stay on and the rendering will take a very long time. If you have less than 256 Mb of RAM, you should not increase this control. Fast render resolution: The fast render resolution moves 128k to the video card at the low range, 2 Mb at the middle range and 24 Mb at the high range. This means that every time you draw in FAST mode you move that much memory to the video card. Unfortunately, if your memory bandwidth is low or your video card is not very fast this slows down the rendering time.
260 Tutorial 15: Data Access Protocol (DAP)
Tutorial 15: Data Access Protocol (DAP) Oasis montaj includes a Geosoft DAP client which enables users to search and retrieve geoscientific datasets, imagery and other map data directly form a DAP server on a local network or on the Internet. There are two types of DAP clients, a thick client (a desktop software application) and a thin client (web browser). Oasis montaj, MapInfo and ArcGIS are thick DAP client software applications. Thick client applications enable you to download and save the actual data to your hard drive, so you can use the data in Oasis montaj or any other GIS or spatial data processing program. Thin clients, like Geosoft’s DAP Data Explorer use a web browser to browse, view and extract data from a DAP server. Visit www.geodap.com/map/ and see how it works! Geosoft’s DAP capability enables both licensed and free Viewer users to access global and corporate spatial servers – Geosoft DAP servers, NASA servers, USGS servers, and the many, many WMS servers currently available. DAP’s main features include: •
Large Volume Data Transfer: DAP technology handles the efficient transfer of very high-volume spatial data, and its associated metadata, through a streaming technology.
•
Spatially Aware: DAP is spatially aware, enabling user-specified spatial querying and retrieval.
•
Ready-to-use Data: DAP provides localized data that matches your current Oasis montaj map window and projection information.
•
Safe and Efficient Data Transfer: DAP data transfer technology provides direct DAP client/server communication enabling the transfer of encrypted and compressed data that maintains original data integrity.
The DAP menu includes two options for finding data, Find Data with Dapple and Find Data.
Find Data with Dapple Use the DAP|Find Data with Dapple option to search for data with Dapple. Dapple, Geosoft's global data explorer, enables you to browse, discover and display graphically rich data from global and corporate spatial servers – Geosoft DAP servers, NASA servers, USGS servers, and the many, many WMS servers currently available. The Dapple project is an open-source activity sponsored by Geosoft and derived from the NASA World Wind (http://worldwind.arc.nasa.gov/) open source project. Dapple represents our effort to make this powerful technology accessible and useful to
Tutorial 15: Data Access Protocol (DAP) 261
professional earth scientists. For more detailed information about Dapple, visit http://dapple.geosoft.com/default.asp Dapple includes a set of menus (Tools, Servers, View, Settings, and Help), an interactive Global Explorer window that displays the selected data layers, a Search window that enables you to define your ‘Area of Interest’ via Servers or the Web based on spatial extents and keywords, a Data Layers window that displays the selected data, an Overview Map window that displays your current spatial extents, and a Metadata window that displays the metadata for the currently selected Data Layer. TO
ACCESS
D APPLE
IN
O ASIS
MONTAJ :
The ability to access data from global and corporate spatial servers (Geosoft DAP servers, NASA servers, USGS servers, and WMS servers) along with the Internet is a powerful and insightful way to work with spatial data. Dapple provides effective data browsing tools for locating geoscience data, satellite imagery, remote sensing data, geology maps, geophysical data, and many other data sets of interest to geoscientists. 1. On the DAP menu, select Find Date with Dapple and the Dapple dialog will be
displayed.
262 Tutorial 15: Data Access Protocol (DAP)
2. To specify the spatial extents you can use the Global Explorer and Navigation
tools, or in the Overview map window you can select an area (including the entire globe) or select a specific region using the dropdown list. You can further focus your Search criteria by entering "Keywords" in the text box ) provided. To clear the search parameters, click the
( Clear search (
) button.
3. In the Search window, select the "Servers" tab and click the Search (
) button. The Available Servers will be searched for any data that falls within your spatial extents and matches your keywords. (Note that, when you select the "Web" tab the Internet will be searched for data files that fall within your area of interest and match your keywords.) The results are displayed on the "Servers" (or 'Web") tab and can be viewed in either 'Tree view' or 'List view'.
Tutorial 15: Data Access Protocol (DAP) 263 4. To download your search results, the selected dataset(s) must be added into the
Data Layers window. To add datasets to the Data Layers window, select (highlight) a dataset from the "Servers" tree view (or select multiple datasets from the "Servers" list view), right-click and from the popup menu, select Add to Data Layers and the selected data will be added to the Data Layers window (Note that you can also use Drag-n-Drop to move the "Search" result datasets to the "Data Layers" window). In the Data Layers window, select (highlight) the datasets to download. Then, on the Tools menu, select "Download Layers" and all selected data layers will begin the download process. 5. Once the download is initiated, the Download Settings dialog will be displayed.
Use this tabbed dialog to set the "General" and "Individual" properties of the downloaded dataset(s). Click the [Download] button to complete the process and download the selected data to your current project directory. For more detailed information on the Dapple dialog, select Help on the main Dapple menu bar.
Find DAP Data Use the Get DAP Data dialog to search for data on one or more DAP data servers. This tool includes a set of menus, an interactive DAP browser window that displays the browser map of the active server, an ‘Area of Interest’ window that enables you to define your view area, and three tabbed dialog tools that control your data retrieval. TO
ACCESS THE
G ET DAP D ATA DIALOG
IN
O ASIS
MONTAJ :
When data is downloaded from the DAP server, it will be windowed, resampled and reprojected to match the current client context within the limitations of the type of data you are dealing with. Note that, you should have a map open and selected (with projection assigned to it) in your current project. 1. On the DAP menu, select Find Data. The Authorize Internet Communication
dialog is displayed. Note: If your Internet Trust Configuration is set to "Trusted" this dialog will not appear. 2. Click the [Authorize] button. The system will query the DAP server to determine
what data the DAP server has that matches the data view of your current map. When a match has been made the Get DAP Data dialog will be displayed.
264 Tutorial 15: Data Access Protocol (DAP)
3. The Results tab, on the right side of the dialog window, will display the data that
is available for download. Note the number of data files available is specified beside the DAP Server name (e.g. 10 datasets are indicated above). Select ( ) the data you would like to downloaded and display on your map. 4. Your Results can be filtered to only display items that intersect your Area of
Interest (AOI) and/or contain Text that matches a Text string. These DAP Filters are provided on the top of the Results tab ( more information on using the DAP Data Filters, click the Help (
). For ) button.
5. The Selected tab enables you to control the both the data to download and the
visibility of the data on the current browser map by placing a check in the box on the left side of the list. You can also use this tab to control the rendering order of the displayed datasets using the upward and downward arrows. Note: To view the selected data sets in the Browser Map check the View Selected Datasets check box ( ). 6. The Get Data tab enables you to specify your selected data options, such as Filename, Resolution, Projection format and Display. Once you are satisfied with
Tutorial 15: Data Access Protocol (DAP) 265
the selected datasets and their download options, click the [Get Data] button to download and display the DAP data on your current map. Note: There are a variety of DAP display technology features available including: re-project the grid to the projection of the current map view, re-project and resample the grid to a specified resolution, save the grid in the native projection format, display the grid as a simple colour image, display the grid as a shaded colour image, and download and save only, do not display the grid. 7. Once the download is complete click the Exit (
) button to close the window. The gridded data will be displayed in your open map. For more information, click the Help (
) button on the Get DAP Data dialog.
Authorizing Your Internet Communication Settings The Authorize Internet Communication dialog box enables you to authorize what communication takes place between your Oasis montaj system and the Geosoft Internet Server. The Internet Trust Relationship dialog box enables you to select the default setting for authorizing all future communication with the server. All communication with the Geosoft Server is encrypted for your privacy and security.
266 Tutorial 15: Data Access Protocol (DAP)
Authorize Internet Communication Dialog This dialog box is displayed when Oasis montaj tries to communicate with an internet server. For example, when you try to locate data on the DAP server. • Click the [Authorize] button to authorize the communication and download the data. • Click [Deny] to cancel the communication. The data will not be downloaded. • Click [Security] to view the Internet Trust Relationship dialog box and change your default authorization setting (see below). Internet Trust Relationship Dialog This dialog box enables you to set the type of access you want when communicating with an internet or external server to download and install software components. You can select from three levels of access that will define how the Geosoft Server will communicate with your computer: Trusted This setting will automatically authorize all communication with the server. This means that you will not be prompted to verify each time you data from the DAP server. All communication with the server is saved in a log file on your local computer so that you can check to see what information was sent and received.
Verify This setting will ask you to verify all communication with the server before proceeding with a download. This means that whenever you query the DAP server, the server will show you what is being requested and ask you to authorize it. Click the [Accept] button to give permission to connect to the server or click the [Deny] button if you do not want toconnect. All communication with the server is saved in a log file on your local computer so that you can check to see what information was sent and received. This is the default setting.
Restricted This setting will not authorize any communication with the server. This means that you do not want any communication with the server to take place. With this setting, you will not be able to connect to the server.
Tip:
You can modify your Internet Trust Settings at any time by selecting the Internet option from the GX|Global Settings menu.
Metadata Browser The Metadata Browser is a tool for viewing metadata associated with a DAP dataset. Metadata is information about data. Metadata can be simple or complex and the descriptive needs of different kinds of data are infinitely diverse. To allow for this
Tutorial 15: Data Access Protocol (DAP) 267
and provide flexibility, Geosoft metadata is stored in a hierarchical data structure called a "meta". The Metadata browser will displays the meta structure (also called a "schema") and the metadata information of a specific data source. Each branch of a metadata structure may contain a set of Attributes with associated Values, and other branches. Following is an example of the metadata that Geosoft may store with Oasis montaj grid files:
Data: The Data branch contains all metadata associated with any spatial data type. The information at the "Data" level is common to all types of spatial data. Grid: This example describes a grid of data, hence there is a "Grid" branch, which contains metadata that is specific to grids. Display: Grids may contain display information about the grid data set, which is stored in the "Grid/Display" branch. Statistics: Grids may contain statistical information about the grid data set, which is stored in the "Grid/Statistics" branch. Location: The information that locates a 2-D grid array within the "Data" coordinate system is stored in the "Grid/Location" branch.
268 Tutorial 15: Data Access Protocol (DAP)
Tutorial 16: Trend Enforcement Gridding Tool 269
Tutorial 16: Trend Enforcement Gridding Tool This tutorial is designed to demonstrate how you can use the Trend Enforcement Gridding Tool to alleviate a traditional problem in gridding geophysical data, i.e. the aliasing problem that occurs due to the presence of more samples “along the lines” than across lines. This problem leads to obvious effects including ellipsoids or ellipsoidal “beads” between lines in gridded data. There are various solutions to these types of effects including filtering and gridding along trend directions. However, these techniques may reduce geologic signal or obscure local trends. In this tutorial, you will first grid a database and examine the resulting grid. You will notice that there are areas of the grid that have “jagged” edges which can be misinterpreted as faults and that may complicate geologic interpretation. These effects occur as an artefact of the gridding process and are independent of the method (i.e. line-based gridding or random gridding). In the case of random gridding (i.e. using RANGRID), the result would be a “bull’s eyes” effect rather than jagged edges (i.e. from BIGRID). A traditional solution is to add a trend line. This method works as long as you match high values and low values. The Trend Enforcement algorithm is designed to perform this process automatically – smoothly joining highs to highs, and lows to lows. The algorithm also makes sure that the highs and lows do not cross (i.e. backtrack).
Before trend enforcement
After trend enforcement
The Trend Enforcement Gridding Tool algorithm is designed to provide a solution that preserves the character of local trends while eliminating aliasing effects. This tutorial will show you how to: • Create a project (page 270)
270 Tutorial 16: Trend Enforcement Gridding Tool
• • • • • • • • • •
Access the Trend enforcement menus (page 271) Open a database for manipulation (page 271) Grid your data using Bigrid (page 272) Display colour-shaded grid (page 274) Find trends with the Trend Enforcement Tool (page 275) Access trend line channels in the database (page 276) Plot trends (page 277) Add your own trends (page 278) Grid trend enforced data (page 279) Deselect/Select trend lines (page 281)
Before you begin This section describes how to begin working with the Trend Enforcement system in Oasis montaj. The topics discussed in this chapter include: • Create a project • Access the Trend Enforcement menus This tutorial uses sample data provided on the Oasis montaj CD and installed in your C:\Program Files\Geosoft\Oasis montaj\data\trend directory. Before you begin the tutorial you need to create a working directory to store all your data. To start this tutorial, please create a working directory called D:\Tutorial. A general rule to follow in working with Geosoft applications is to avoid working in the Geosoft directory. In these tutorials, we will follow this rule by keeping all the working data in our working directory D:\Tutorial.
Creating a project To work in Oasis montaj requires an open project. An Oasis montaj "Project" controls your working directory. When you create a project, the system assumes that all your project files are located in the same directory. T O C REATE
A
P ROJECT :
1. Start Oasis montaj. 2. On the File menu, select Project and then click New. The New Project dialog is
displayed.
Tutorial 16: Trend Enforcement Gridding Tool 271
Oasis montaj assumes that your data is in the directory containing this project (i.e. D:\Tutorial) 3. Specify a name and directory for the project. For example, name the project (Trend) and specify the working directory as D:\Tutorial. Note:
4. Click the [Save] button. The system saves the project and indicates it is open by
adding menus to the menu bar, adding buttons to the Standard Short-cut bar and by displaying the Project Explorer window. These are visual clues indicating that you are ready to start working with the system.
Accessing the Trend Enforcement menus The Trend enforcement menu can be accessed from the Grid and Image menu on the Oasis montaj main menu bar. TO
ACCESS THE
T REND E NFORCEMENT M ENU :
1. On the Grid and Image menu, select Gridding and then select Trend enforcement.
The Trend Enforcement menu will be displayed. (TRENDDB.GX) (TRNDPATH.GX) (TRNDDIGI.GX)
2. These menus items (GXs) will enable you to eliminate aliasing effects while
preserving the character of local trends.
Opening a Database In this exercise, you will be working with the database (trend_mag.gdb), which should be copied into your current working directory D:\Tutorial.
272 Tutorial 16: Trend Enforcement Gridding Tool T O D ISPLAY
A
D ATABASE
1. On the Database menu, select Open database. The Open database dialog is
displayed. 2. Select the (trend_mag.gdb) and click the [Open] button. The database is opened
and displayed in a spreadsheet window.
Gridding your data using Bigrid Gridding refers to the process of interpolating data onto an equally spaced “grid” of values in a specified coordinate system, such as X-Y. The Trend Enforcement Tool enables you to use either the Bigrid (Bi-Directional) gridding method for line-based data, and Rangrid (Minimum curvature) or Kriging (Statistical local estimation) gridding technique for random based data. In this exercise we will use the Bigrid method. T O A PPLY B I -D IRECTIONAL G RIDDING
TO
D ATA:
1. On the Grid and Image menu, select Gridding, then select Bi-Directional Line
Gridding. The Bi-directional gridding of line data dialog is displayed.
2. Using the Channel to grid dropdown list, select Mag. Specify the Output grid as
(trend) and specify the Grid cell size, as (25).
Tutorial 16: Trend Enforcement Gridding Tool 273 Note:
If no cell size is specified, the default is ¼ of the line spacing. For more
information, click the Help ( ) button. 3. To access the Advanced gridding parameters, click the [Advanced>] button. The Advanced Gridding options dialog is displayed.
4. You can leave these parameters to the intelligent default values. For more
information, click the Help (
) button.
5. To return to the Bi-directional gridding of line data dialog click the [
button. Click the [OK] button to grid the data. The grid (trend.gdb) is displayed in a temporary map.
274 Tutorial 16: Trend Enforcement Gridding Tool
Displaying a Colour Shaded Grid When working with the Trend Enforcement Tool system it is sometimes useful to display the data as a Colour-shaded grid. T O D ISPLAY C OLOUR S HADED G RID : 1. On the Grid and Image menu, select Display grid and then select Colour-shaded
grid. The Colour-shaded grid image dialog is displayed.
Tutorial 16: Trend Enforcement Gridding Tool 275 2. Using the Grid name dropdown list, select (trend.grd). Leave the remaining
parameters to the default values and click the [Current Map] button to display the Colour-shaded grid on the current map (trend.grd).
Colour-shaded grid displaying aliasing effects
Finding Trends A traditional problem in gridding geophysical data is the aliasing problem that occurs due to the presence of more samples “along the lines” than “across lines”. This leads to obvious effects including ellipsoids or ellipsoidal “beads” between lines in gridded data. T O F IND T RENDS : 1. On the Grid and Image menu, select Gridding|Trend Enforcement and then select
Find trends. The Find trend lines in a database dialog is displayed.
276 Tutorial 16: Trend Enforcement Gridding Tool
2. Using the Data channel for trends dropdown list, select (mag). In the Window for
Max-Min Search box, specify (500) and in the Preferred angle for trends box specify (125). Then, in the Allowable deviation in angle box, specify (30.0) and in the Maximum length for joins box, specify (1000). You can leave the remaining parameters to the intelligent default values. For a detailed description of these parameters, click the Help (
) button.
3. When ready to continue, click the [OK] button. The system calculates the Trend
lines and places this information in your database. Note: When using Rangrid as your gridding technique, you must specify a value in the “Re-sampling interval along trends” parameter. If no value is entered, the Trend Enforcement Tool will not calculate the appropriate trend lines. For more information on Finding Trends click the Help (
) button.
Accessing Trend Lines in Database You may want to review your trend lines before you plot them on a map or regrid your data using the trend enforced data. T O A CCESS T REND L INES
IN
D ATABASE :
1. To access the trend lines select your database (trend_mag.gdb). 2. Click on the Line Header Cell (upper left cell). Click the right mouse button.
From the popup menu select List. Another popup menu will appear containing a list of the lines in the database. Scroll down the list and select R0:0 (the minima trend lines). The system displays the minima trend lines (start and end points) in the database.
Tutorial 16: Trend Enforcement Gridding Tool 277 Note:
When you click on a data value (X, Y or Z) in the database, you will notice that the linked map cursor moves to the selected location of the trend line on the map.
Linked data point
Plotting Trend Lines The Trend Enforcement Tool displays the trend lines in the original database. Two new lines will be added, R0:0 (Minima trend) and R1:0 (Maxima trend). T O P LOT T REND L INES : 1. On the Grid and Image menu, select Gridding|Trend Enforcement and then select
Plot trends. The Trend Line path plot dialog is displayed.
2. Using the Colour for minimum trends (R0, R2, etc) and the Colour for maximum
trends (R1, R3, etc), select (red) and (blue) and for Line thickness specify (0.15). (These colours are the opposite of the gridding convention so that these show up clearly on the map.) 3. Click the [OK] button. The No defined map scale dialog is displayed.
278 Tutorial 16: Trend Enforcement Gridding Tool
4. Note that, this dialog is displayed whenever drawing to a map for which a map
scale has not been defined. This situation most commonly occurs when a map has been opened just to display a grid image (as applies here). A map scale is required to determine appropriate scaling for drawing text, patterned lines, and other map graphic details. 5. Click the [OK] button to accept the default parameters, for more information
click the Help (
) button.
6. The trend lines are plotted on the current map (trend.map).
Trend lines, Maximum values (blue), Minimum values (red).
Adding Your Own Trend Lines The Trend Enforcement Tool may not find all of the trend lines in your database. You can interactively digitize a trend line from a grid and add it to the end of a line in the current database. You also have the ability to resample the trend line to a specified sample interval (necessary when using the random gridding techniques). T O A DD Y OUR O WN T REND
LINES :
1. On the Grid and Image menu, select Gridding|Trend Enforcement and then select
Add trend line. The Add new digitized trend line dialog is displayed.
Tutorial 16: Trend Enforcement Gridding Tool 279
2. Using the [Browse] button, locate the Grid to digitize as (trend2_s.grd) and from
the Output channel dropdown list, select (mag). In the Re-sample interval box specify (25). (It is recommended that the trend line be re-sampled at the same cell size as the grid.) 3. Click the [OK] button to continue. The Digitize to database dialog box is
displayed.
7. Click the [OK] button to begin digitizing. 8. Draw a Trend Line by selecting points (either minimum or maximum point
values) on the displayed grid. When you are finished each line, click the rightmouse button and select Done. 9. The digitized trend line data values, which have been interpolated to the specified
re-sample interval, will be added to trend line “R2” in the database. Additional trend lines added to the database will be added to the end of trend line “R2” separated by a dummy value ( * ).
Gridding Trend Enforced Data You can now re-grid your data, using the same parameters as the trend.grd. T O A PPLY B I -D IRECTIONAL G RIDDING
TO
T REND E NFORCED D ATA:
1. On the Grid and Image menu, select Gridding, then select Bi-Directional line
gridding. The Bi-directional gridding of line data dialog is displayed.
280 Tutorial 16: Trend Enforcement Gridding Tool
2. We will be using the same parameters as the original grid (trend.grd) except we
will change the name of the Output grid file to (Trend_2.grd). 3. Click the [OK] button to grid the data and display the grid in a temporary map.
Comparing the two grids We can display the two grids side by side to see the difference the trend enforced gridding has on the data (note that, the grid (trend_2.grd) should be displayed as a colour shaded grid to properly compare the two grids).
Tutorial 16: Trend Enforcement Gridding Tool 281
The original grid trend.grd (left) the Trended grid trend_2.grd (right). Note: The actual data values and locations are exactly the same in both grids. The Trend Enforcement Tool forces the gridding process to honour the trended data. Trend lines must be selected to be included in gridding. You can deselect the trend line(s) for other processes with the database.
Deselecting/Selecting Trend Lines You may want to deselect/select your trend lines for other processing applications. T O D ESELECT /S ELECT T REND L INES
IN A
D ATABASE :
To access the trend lines select your database (trend_mag.gdb). 1. Click on the Line Header Cell (upper left cell). 2. Click the right mouse button and from the popup menu, select Selections and then
select Selection Tool.
282 Tutorial 16: Trend Enforcement Gridding Tool
3. The Line Selection Tool dialog box is displayed.
4. Scroll down the list and highlight R0:0 then click the [Deselect highlight] button.
The check mark beside the line is removed. 5. Repeat the previous step for R1:0 and R2:0. Click the [OK] button to continue. 6. To select lines repeat above procedure clicking the [Select highlight] button and
a check mark will be placed beside the line.
Appendix 1: Understanding Spheroids and Datums 283
Appendix 1: Understanding Spheroids and Datums Spheroids A spheroid is an oblate ellipsoid of revolution (basically an ellipsoid) that is used to model the surface of the earth for making maps. A spheroid is defined by an earth radius, which is the major axis of the ellipsoid, and the flattening (f), which can also be expressed as the eccentricity (e) or ellipticity (l).
l = 1/f e = sqrt((2/l) - 1/(l*l)) e = sqrt(2f - f*f ) In the past, as cartographers created maps of different parts of the earth, spheroids were chosen to best approximate the shape of the earth in the region of the map. This led to a number of different spheroids or ellipsoids (such as Clarke 1866, Hayford 1910, etc.) that are in common use for different parts of the world. In some cases, maps of a particular region of the earth have been created with different spheroids and it is necessary to convert coordinates from one spheroid to another. This only works if both spheroids share the same earth centre, which they normally will for older maps. This is because map survey work has normally used gravity as the reference for the earth centre, and maps of the same area will clearly have used the same gravity field. Datums The problem with using spheroids alone to define an earth model becomes apparent when working with satellite locations from GPS receivers. GPS systems commonly base locations on a spheroid known as World Geodetic System 1984 (WGS 1984), which naturally places the centre of the earth at the true centre of gravity. Unfortunately, this differs from the earth centre that has been used for most local maps of the world because these maps use an assumed earth centre based on the local gravity field, which is perpendicular to the geoid at that location. To account for this we need a datum. A datum includes a spheroid and an earth centre offset from WGS 1984. Some datums may also include a rotation of the minor axis of the spheroid relative to WGS 1984. Datums for various countries and regions of the world have been compiled and defined in the MAPPROJ.DTM file. W HAT
DOES THIS MEAN ?
What this means is that longitude/latitude in one datum is not necessarily the same as in another datum (there may be an offset and rotation). Before the earth centre was introduced, all we needed was a spheroid (ie. Hayford 1910). This worked fine for projections within the same country or region of the earth because the earth centre was the same. Note that Hayford 1910 is not a datum, it is a spheroid. If the spheroid
284 Appendix 1: Understanding Spheroids and Datums
alone is specified, an earth offset (X,Y,Z) of (0,0,0) with no rotation (see MAPPROJ.DTM) is required. Working with spheroids and datums A common mistake that is made when using projections in Oasis montaj is to mix projections based on a spheroid with projections that use a datum. For example, you may be in South America and you have data that is defined as using the Hayford 1910 spheroid, and you wish to convert this to a local map datum, say the Brazil Corrego Alegre datum, which is based on the International 1924 spheroid with an earth centre offset of (206,-172,6). In this case, your input projection datum should be HAYF1910 (Hayford 1910), and your output projection datum should be INT1924 (International 1924), NOT 55INT924 (Brazil Corrego Allegre). This is because you only know the spheroid of the input, not the full datum, so you must only use the spheroid of the output system and assume that both coordinates use the same earth centre, which is usually the case. The only exception is when dealing with GPS locations based on WGS 1984 as the input coordinate. Here, you in fact do know the full datum of the input because all WGS 1984 has a (0,0,0) offset. In this case, specify the input projection as WGS1984 and the output projection as 55INT924.
Understanding local datums Local datum transforms are used to convert coordinates between different map datums. For example, a local datum transform is required to convert longitude, latitude coordinates on the WGS 84 datum to longitude, latitude coordinates on the NAD27 (North American Datum 1927). The difference in location that arises between map datums can be up to several hundred metres. The key to understanding local datum transforms is an understanding of the geoid and its relationship to a Datum. A geoid is the actual shape of the earth at mean sea level, which is everywhere normal due to the earth’s gravitational force. Because of local and regional variations in the earth’s gravity field, the geoid is not a perfect mathematical form, but rather it has local variations. These variations are illustrated in the following diagram (from Verhoogan, John, Francis J. Turner, Lionel E. Weiss, Clyde Wahrhaftig, William S. Fyfe (1970), The Earth, Holt, Rinehart and Winston, Inc., New York.):
topographic surface geoid ellipsoid
Appendix 1: Understanding Spheroids and Datums 285
To make maps, an ellipsoid is used to approximate the geoid for a specific region of the world. An ellipsoid is an ellipse rotated about its shorter axis (also called an oblate spheroid), which is what the geoid would be if the mass of the earth were uniformly distributed. A datum is the earth model that is used to map a specific region of the world. A datum includes an ellipsoid (described by the major axis and flattening), the prime meridian (location of 0 longitude, normally Greenwich England), and a tie point, which is the location on the earth at which the ellipsoid and the geoid are the same for the region that the Datum is used. The ellipsoid and tie point have been chosen so that the differences between the surface of the ellipsoid and the geoid are minimised. Most common mapping operations within the same datum are only concerned with the ellipsoid, which is why an ellipsoid name is often used interchangeably with a datum name. With the advent of satellites and later the Global Positioning System, it became necessary to define datums tied to the gravitational centre of the earth (as opposed to being tied to a location on the earth’s surface). Such datums are called geocentric, and the most common example is WGS 84. Most of the difference between an earth surface ties datum and a geocentric datum can be described by a shift in the location of the centre of the ellipsoid (the assumed earth centre). However, there can also be a small rotation difference caused by differences in the direction of North, and a scale factor caused by differences between the elevation of the tie point and mean sea level. In addition, local perturbations of the geoid that result from local gravity variations within a Datum will produce additional “residual” differences. To convert between datums requires knowledge about all aspects of both datums (the ellipsoids, prime meridians and the local perturbations of the Geoid). There are a number of methods used to transform coordinates between datums (see http://www.petroconsultants.com/products/geodetic2.html), although in practice, the following two methods supported in Oasis montaj are the most commonly used: Method 1 The most familiar method is to perform an earth centre shift, rotation and scale, commonly referred to as the Bursa Wolf 7-parameter transform (parameters are X,Y,Z offsets, X,Y,Z rotations and a scale factor). The Molodenski transform is a simplification that deals with three parameters only (X,Y,Z offsets). These transforms are only close approximations to the true perturbations, and datums that cover a large region often require a number of different "local" definitions (for example, NAD27 has at least 6 different transforms to WGS 84). The Bursa Wolf transform is supported in Oasis montaj. Parameters of the transform are listed in the file “datumtrf.csv” for different local datums, and the file “ldatum.csv” contains a reference list based on the common area of use for each datum transform.
286 Appendix 1: Understanding Spheroids and Datums
Method 2 Some national mapping agencies have carefully measured accurate “residual” differences across a Datum. This is done by measuring the differences between local map coordinates and WGS 84 at numerous locations. Such differences are described by “correction "grids”, which contain longitude, latitude and elevation shifts as a function of location. Examples are NADCON in the US and NTv2 in Canada, both of which are supported in Oasis montaj (NTv2 in Oasis Montaj is a 20 minute approximation of the full NTv2 transform). Note that NADCON and NTv2 are not accurately defined for offshore areas and should not be used for offshore mapping purposes. In Oasis montaj, the residual grids are stored as compressed look-up tables in files with extension “.ll2” in the Oasis montaj/etc directory. The name of the table is found in the square brackets that are part of the local datum transform name. For example, the lookup tables used for local datum transform “*NAD27 NTv2 (20 min) [NTv2]” are found in the file “NTv2.ll2”. Note that Bursa Wolf transforms are very much faster than NADCON or NTv2, and will normally be accurate to the sub-metre level for local regions. In future, as more correction grid models are defined, they will be added to the model list.
Choosing a local datum transform A local datum transform is used to convert coordinates between different datums. The most common example of this is the conversion of GPS locations on the WGS-84 datum to a local map datum. The list below shows the options for the Choose local datum transform dialog box. Datum
The currently selected datum name is displayed for your information. You must go back to the previous dialog to change the datum.
Local datum transform
Select a local datum transform name from the list. Normally, the list will only include known local datum(s) for the Datum specified. If there are no local datum for the datum specified, all datums will be available in the list and the default transform will be “”. If you do not know the local datum transform to use, or if you will always be working the same datum, you will want to select the option in this box. When this option is applied, no local transform is used.
[List All]
If the specified datum has a set of known local datum transforms, these will appear in the list by default. However, if you have chosen the wrong datum, and you know the local datum transform, you may choose to list all known local datum transforms.
Appendix 1: Understanding Spheroids and Datums 287
Local datum CSV files Local datum transforms are listed in the files “ldatum.csv”, which is the list used by this dialog. The local datum EPSG/POSC 1 name is referenced in the “Datum_trf” column of this file, and the “datumtrf.csv” file contains the actual local datum transform parameters. If you add your own custom local datum, it must be added to both files. Each local datum transform has an associated Datum (such as NAD27). If you choose a local datum transform that is for a datum different from the one selected previously, the datum will be changed. This is allowed, but under normal circumstances it means that there is probably something wrong about the coordinate system you are using. Changing the datum should therefore only be done with caution and an understanding of datum issues. Adding your own local datum transform You cannot add lookup-based local datum transforms. You can add your own 7parameter local datum transforms to the datum tables. For example, perhaps we want to define a special version of the “Luzon 1911” datum that we have used which is part of the Philippines. T O A DD
A
L OCAL D ATUM T RANSFORM :
1. To add this datum, you need to modify two CSV files in the Geosoft directory
using the following information: EPSG datum name
The name of the datum on which the local transform is based. This should be an accepted EPSG name, one of the datum names listed in the table “datum.csv”. In this case, the datum is “Luzon 1911”.
Transform name
Choose a name that describes the datum. Since your name is not an EPSG name, you must start the name with a “*” character. For example, “*Luzon special”.
Area of use
Describe the area of use so that the transform can be chosen based on the area. For example, “[Luzon 1911] Philippines -special”. By convention, we include the datum name in square brackets at the beginning of each area of use description.
dX,dY,dZ
Translation vector in metres to be added to a geocentric Cartesian coordinate point in the projection to produce WGS 84 geocentric Cartesian coordinates. For example, “130,-77,-50”. Note that the sign convention is important, and Geosoft conforms to EPSG convention as described
1
EPSG (European Petroleum Survey Group) / POSC (Petrotechnical Open Software Corporation).
288 Appendix 1: Understanding Spheroids and Datums
here. The inverse sign convention is also in common use elsewhere. rX,rY,rZ
Rotations in arc-seconds (degrees/3600) to be added to a geocentric Cartesian coordinate point vector in the projection to produce a WGS 84 geocentric Cartesian coordinate vector. The sign convention is such that a positive rotation about an axis is defined as a clockwise rotation of the position vector when viewed from the positive direction of the axis. A positive rotation about the Z axis (Rz) will result in a larger longitude. Most transforms (all Molodenski based projections) will use “0,0,0”.
Scale
The scale correction to be multiplied by the geocentric Cartesian coordinate in the map projection to obtain the correct scale in WGS 84 coordinates. This scale is expressed in ppm so that the actual scale is (1 + scale/1,000,000). For example, “0.225”.
2. Once you have gathered this information, edit the file “datumtrf.csv” (this can be
edited in Excel or in a text editor). The first line of the file contains the column header that describes each data field as follows: DATUM_TRF,CODE,MAPINFO,AREA_OF_USE,DATUM,TARGET,DX,DY,DZ,RX,RY,RZ,SCALE
For the transform described in the example above, the line would be: “*Luzon special”,,,"[Luzon 1911] Philippines - special","Luzon 1911","WGS 84",-130,-77,50,0,0,0,0.225
The “CODE” and “MAPINFO” columns are used to reference the EPSG code and MapInfo code when exporting data to these systems. In this case, these codes are not known and are left blank. Unknown MapInfo codes can also be set to “0”. The “WGS84” is specified as the “TARGET” since these transform parameters are relative to WGS84 (by far the most commonly used geocentric datum). 3. Now edit the “ldatum.csv” file and add an entry so that the transform will be
visible to the user in the projection wizard dialogue screens. This table contains the following columns: AREA_OF_USE,DATUM,DATUM_TRF
The new entry would be: "[Luzon 1911] Philippines – special ","Luzon 1911","“*Luzon special"
The DATUM_TRF in this file must match exactly the DATUM_TRF column in the “datumtrf.csv ” file.
Appendix 1: Understanding Spheroids and Datums 289
Oasis montaj projection files and reference tables This section is for users who want to develop their own projections or know the details of the projection methods used in Oasis montaj. The section contains information on the various files used by Oasis montaj for projections. GI projection files (*.gi) Map views and databases have the projection information imbedded in the file. Oasis montaj stores all the projection information for a particular grid file (.grd) in a GI (.gi) file. For example, the grid file mag.grd, would have an associated projection file named mag.grd.gi. Important!
When copying a grid file to another directory, you must copy any existing (grd.gi) files associated with the data file in order to maintain the projection information for the grid.
Projection table files Oasis montaj 5.1 uses CSV files as lookup tables for projection information. These reference files are described in the list below: Reference Files
Description
ipj_pcs.csv
List of all known projected coordinate systems, provides the Transform and the Datum lookup names
transform.csv
List of known transforms of the world, and their parameters
datum.csv
List of known datums of the world, provides central meridian and the ellipsoid lookup
ellipsoid.csv
All known ellipsoids of the world and their parameters
datumtrf.csv
All known local datums, provides Datum lookup and the local datum transform parameters
ldatum.csv
A listing of local datums by area of use. This table is only used by the Projection Wizard
All names in the tables are POSC (Petrotechnical Open Software Corporation) compliant, unless they begin with an *. The asterix usually signifies that the projection is a custom projection.
290 Appendix 1: Understanding Spheroids and Datums
Projection name tables The following tables are used to define a common set of key parameters for projections and units used in GXF. The first column of each table is a key name, which is unique within each table. Key names that are not POSC compliant start with an (asterisk) character. Table 1: Projection transformation methods This table identifies all defined projection transformation methods. The parameters are listed in the order required in the #MAP_PROJECTION data object. This table was compiled using EPSG (as of 2000/12/28)) as data sources. The order of parameters is based on the enumerated parameter order specified in the EPSG table "TRF_METHOD", with unused parameters omitted. Should EPSG add new methods in the future, GXF support for those methods implied, and order of required parameters will be as defined by EPSG. EPSG "Transverse Mercator (South Orientated)" is the same as POSC "Transverse Mercator (South Oriented)", which corrects the spelling of "Oriented". P ARAMETER N OTES :
• • • • •
All distance references must be specified in metres. All geographic references (latitudes and longitudes) are specified in degrees. Longitudes in the Western hemisphere are negative. Latitudes in the Southern hemisphere are negative. Longitudes are relative to the prime meridian of the datum Projection method
Required parameters
Geographic
No parameters. This indicates that coordinates are longitudes and latitudes.
Hotine Oblique Mercator
Latitude of projection centre Longitude of projection centre Azimuth of initial line Angle from Rectified to Skew Grid Scale factor on initial line False Easting False Northing
Appendix 1: Understanding Spheroids and Datums 291
Laborde Oblique Mercator
Latitude of projection centre Longitude of projection centre Azimuth of initial line Scale factor on initial line False Easting False Northing
Lambert Conic Conformal (1SP)
Latitude of natural origin Longitude of natural origin Scale factor at natural origin False Easting False Northing
Lambert Conic Conformal (2SP)
Latitude of first standard parallel Latitude of second standard parallel Latitude of false origin Longitude of false origin Easting at false origin Northing at false origin
Lambert Conformal (2SP Belgium)
Latitude of first standard parallel Latitude of second standard parallel Latitude of false origin Longitude of false origin Easting at false origin Northing at false origin
Mercator (1SP)
Latitude of natural origin Longitude of natural origin Scale factor at natural origin False Easting False Northing
Mercator (2SP)
Latitude of first standard parallel Longitude of natural origin False Easting False Northing
292 Appendix 1: Understanding Spheroids and Datums
New Zealand Map Grid
Latitude of natural origin Longitude of natural origin False Easting False Northing
Oblique Stereographic
Latitude of natural origin Longitude of natural origin Scale factor at natural origin False Easting False Northing
Polar Stereographic
Latitude of natural origin Longitude of natural origin Scale factor at natural origin False Easting False Northing
Swiss Oblique Cylindrical
Latitude of projection centre Longitude of projection centre Easting at projection centre Northing at projection centre
Transverse Mercator
Latitude of natural origin Longitude of natural origin Scale factor at natural origin False Easting False Northing
Transverse Mercator (South Oriented)
Latitude of natural origin Longitude of natural origin Scale factor at natural origin False Easting False Northing
Equidistant Conic
Latitude of first standard parallel Latitude of second standard parallel Latitude of false origin Longitude of false origin Easting at false origin Northing at false origin
Appendix 1: Understanding Spheroids and Datums 293
Latitude of false origin
Polyconic
Longitude of false origin Scale factor at natural origin Easting at false origin Northing at false origin
Table 2: Length units The following table is compiled from the UNIT_OF_LENGTH table in the EPSG tables. The unit names are the abbreviations defined in POSC. This table is for convenient reference only, and the EPSG table is considered the primary reference. Unit
Description
Factor to metres
m
metre
1.0
ft
foot
0.3048
ftUS
US survey foot
0.3048006096012
ftMA
modified American foot
0.3048122529845
ftCla
Clarke's foot
0.3047972651151
ftInd
Indian foot (Clarke)
0.3047995102481
ftSe
foot (Sears)
0.3047994715387
lkCla
link (Clarke)
0.201166194976
lkBen
link (Benoit)
0.2011678249438
lkSe
link (Sears)
0.2011676512155
chBen
chain (Benoit)
20.1167824943759
chSe
chain (Sears)
20.1167651215526
ydSe
yard (Sears)
0.914398414616
ydInd
Indian yard
0.9143985539701
fathom
Fathom
1.8288
nautmi
nautical mile
1852.0
mGer
German legal metre
1.0000135965
dega
Degrees (angular)
n/a
294 Appendix 2: Geosoft Line and Pattern Styles
Appendix 2: Geosoft Line and Pattern Styles Geosoft provides a number of Line and Pattern Styles for use in Oasis montaj. The following table displays the “Family” name of each Line and Pattern Style and some examples. The following five pages include all of the available Line and Pattern Styles that are currently available in Oasis montaj and can be printed and used as a reference. L INE S TYLES Family Name
Examples
P ATTERN S TYLES Family Name
Standard
Solid fill
Fancy
Objects
Geology
Hatches
Arrows
Geology
Slashes
Shapes
Example Solid Orange
STANDARD PATTERNS Solid Line
Long Dash
Dotted Short Dash
Long, Short Dash Dash Dot
Pattern #7
Pattern #8
Very Short Dash
Pattern #10
Double Line Bold Dots
Dots - 2 Pattern #148
Pickets Dash Down - 4
FANCY LINES
Equals
Railroad Dash - 4
Railroad Dash -2
Railroad - Dash
Railroad - 4
Railroad - 2
Railroad
Pattern #150
Pattern #149
Pickets Dash Up - 4
Pickets Dash Up - 2
Pickets Dash Up
Pickets Up - 4
Pickets Up - 2
Pickets Up
Pattern #130
Pattern #129
Pattern #128
Bold Dots - 2
Sidewalk #1
Sidewalk #2
Sidewalk #3 Stripe #1
Stripe #2
Stripe #3
Ecks Ecks - 2
Ecks - 4
Ecks Line
Pattern #11
Pattern #12
Pattern #138 Pattern #139
Ecks Line - 2 Ecks Line - 4
Pattern #13
Pattern #14
Pattern #140 Pickets Down
Ecks Dash Ecks Dash - 2
Pickets Down - 2
Pickets Down - 4
Ecks Dash - 4 Ecks Dotted
Pickets Dash Down Pickets Dash Down - 2
Ecks Dotted - 2 Dots
SLASHES
Forward Slash
Forward Slash #2
Forward Slash - Line Down
Forward Slash - Line Up
Forward Slash - Line #2 Down
Forward Slash - Line #2 Up
Backward Slash
Backward Slash #2
Backward Slash - Line Down
Backward Slash - Line Up
Backward Slash - Line #2 Down
Backward Slash - Line #2 Up
Hash
Pattern #501
Pattern #502 Pattern #503
Arrow Forward
Arrow Forward - 2
Arrow Forward - 4
Pattern #507
Dashed Arrow Forward
Dashed Arrow Forward - 2
Dashed Arrow Forward - 4
Pattern #511
Pattern #512
Pattern #513
Arrow Backward
Arrow Backward - 2
Arrow Backward - 4
Pattern #517
ARROWS
Dashed Arrow Backward
Dashed Arrow Backward - 2
Dashed Arrow Backward - 4
Arrows Up
Arrows Up - 2
Arrows Down
Arrows Down - 2
Pattern #525
Pattern #526
Pattern #527
Arrows Line Up
Arrows Line Up - 2
Arrows Line Up - 4
Arrows Dash Up
Arrows Dash Up - 2
Arrows Dash Up - 4
Pattern #535
Pattern #536
Pattern #537
Arrows Line Down
Arrows Line Down - 2
Arrows Line Down - 4
Arrows Dash Down
Arrows Dash Down - 2
Arrows Dash Down - 4
SHAPES
Empty Triangles Down - 2
Empty Triangles Down
Filled Circles #2
Filled Star of David
Filled Circles
Empty Circles
Empty Star of David
Filled Star of David - 2
Filled Diamonds
Empty Star of David - 2
Empty Circles #2
Filled Diamonds #2
Empty Diamonds #2
Empty Star
Filled Star - 2
Filled Star
Filled Triangles Up
Empty Star - 2
Empty Diamonds
Filled Triangles Up - 2
Filled Square
Empty Square - 2
Empty Square
Filled Square - 2
Filled Triangles Down
Filled Triangles Down - 2
Empty Triangles Up
Empty Triangles Up - 2
Fault
Shear
Pattern #203
Right Fault Line
Pattern #205
Right Fault Line - 2
Pattern #207
Right Fault Line 4 Pattern #209
Right Fault
Pattern #211
Right Fault 2
Pattern #213
Thrust Dash
Line Thrust - 2
Line Thrust
Geosoft GEOLOGY Linestyles - SHEET 1 of 2
Thrust Dash 2
Left Fault Line 2
Pattern #219
Pattern #270
Half Circle Line
Half Circle Line - 2
Half Circle Line - 4
Half Circle Dash
Half Circle Dash - 2
Half Circle Dash - 4
Half Empty Circle - 2
Half Empty Circle Pattern #259
Pattern #280
Empty Half Circle Line - 2
Empty Half Circle Line
Line Thrust Down - 2
Half Circle Down - 2
Half Circle Down
Empty Half Circle Dash - 4
Empty Half Circle Dash - 2
Empty Half Circle Dash
Empty Half Circle Line - 4
Half Circle - 2
Half Circle
Dash Thrust Down - 4
Dash Thrust Down - 2
Dash Thrust Down
Line Thrust Down - 4
Line Thrust Down
Pattern #260
Pattern #258
Dash Thrust - 4
Dash Thrust - 2
Dash Thrust
Line Thrust - 4
Thrust Dash 4
Pattern #250
Pattern #249
Pattern #248
Thrust Dash Down - 4
Thrust Dash Down - 2
Thrust Dash Down
Thrust Line Down - 4
Thrust Line Down - 2
Thrust Line Down
Pattern #240
Thrust Down - 2
Thrust Down
Left Fault Line 4
Pattern #221
Left Fault
Pattern #223
Left Fault 2
Pattern #225
Left Fault 4
Clastic Shear
Thrust
Thrust 2
Pattern #230 Thrust Line
Right Fault 4
Pattern #215
Thrust Line 2
Thrust Line 4
Left Fault Line
Pattern #217
Pattern #290
Geosoft GEOLOGY Linestyles - SHEET 2 of 2
Empty Circle Dash
Empty Circle Dash - 2
Filled Circle
Filled Circle - 2
Pattern #328
Half Circle Down Line
Filled Circle - 4
Dip Dash Down
Dip Dash Down - 2
Dip Dash Down - 4
Anticline - 4
Anticline Dash
Anticline Dash - 2
Pattern #348
Pattern #368
Half Circle Down Line - 2
Pattern #329
Pattern #349
Dip Dash Up
Dip Line Up - 4
Dip Line Up - 2
Stitch Dash
Stitch - 4
Stitch - 2
Stitch
Filled Circle Dash - 4
Anticline Dash - 4
Pattern #330
Dip Dash Up - 2
Stitch Dash - 2
Dip Line Up
Empty Circle
Dip Dash Up - 4
Stitch Dash - 4
Pattern #359
Pattern #360
Anticline
Anticline - 2
Syncline Dash - 4
Syncline Dash - 2
Syncline Dash
Syncline - 4
Syncline - 2
Syncline
Pattern #370
Pattern #369
Filled Circle Line
Filled Circle Line - 2
Filled Circle Line - 4
Empty Circle - 2
Pattern #338
Filled Circle Dash - 2
Pattern #320
Dip Line Down
Dip Line Down - 2
Pattern #358 Pattern #339
Empty Circle Line
Empty Circle Line - 2
Empty Circle Line - 4
Pattern #340
Pattern #321
Filled Circle Dash
Pattern #350
Half Circle Down Line - 4
Half Circle Down Dash
Half Circle Down Dash - 2
Half Circle Down Dash - 4
Empty Half Circle Down
Empty Half Circle Down - 2
Pattern #300
Empty Half Circle Down Line
Empty Half Circle Down Line - 2
Empty Half Circle Down Line - 4
Empty Half Circle Down Dash
Empty Half Circle Down Dash - 2
Empty Half Circle Down Dash - 4
Dip Line Down - 4
GEOSOFT FILL PATTERNS
Horizontal Lines
HATCH Alluvium
Vertical Lines
Half Diagonal Right
GEOLOGY
Schist
Diagonal Right
Half Diagonal Left
Horizontal Half
Random Conglomerate
Tuff
Diagonal Left
Conglomerate
Clastic 1
Igneous
Staggered Lines
Bricks
Vertical Half
Clastic 2
Siltstone
Cross Hatch
Clastic 3
Dolomite
Diagonal Cross Hatch
Diagonal Basket Weave
Basket Weave
Chert
Volcanic 1
Volcanic 2
Mudstone
Diamond
Volcanic 3
Hexagonal Triangles
OBJECTS Dots
Random Triangles
Plus
Hexagonal Dots
Random Dots
Diagonal Plus
X'es
Dashes
Boxes
Random Plus
Random Circle
Circle
Diagonal Boxes
Random Boxes
Triangles
300 Glossary
Glossary array channels
channels column database datum
desktop
Special channels in columns of the spreadsheet that contain multiple channels of data. Array channels are represented graphically by a curve in the spreadsheet. See also channels, sub-array channels. In the Oasis montaj spreadsheet, a channel is essentially a column that contains a specific type of data. In the Oasis montaj spreadsheet, a vertical line of cells that contain data. See Oasis database A reference value to which other measurements are referred. Also, an arbitrary reference level to which measurements are corrected. For example, a datum for elevation would be sea level. Background area in the Oasis montaj project. You can open and display a virtually unlimited number of Spreadsheet, Profile and Map windows in this area.
ellipsoid
A solid figure (shaped like an egg or oval) for which every cross-section is an ellipse.
fiducials
Points accepted as fixed bases of reference. Marks indicating the order in which each reading or sample reading was taken.
Graphical User Interface
Interactive software environment where functions are performed by selecting graphic objects.
grid
Collection of points along rows and columns that define a two-dimensional rectangular area on some plan, usually a ground plan.
Grids or Grid file
groups
GX or Geosoft eXecutable images or image file
line local datum transform main window
Files containing location (X and Y) and data (Z) values. Values are typically interpolated to create a regular and smoothly sampled representation of the locations and data. A set of graphics elements that make up a graphic component of the map. For example, a line path plot, a contour plot or a profile plot would all be separate graphics groups within the Data View. Programmed process (identified by the *.GX file extension) used to process data in Oasis montaj. Files containing location (X and Y) and Colour values. The values are not interpolated. Standard PC file types created using imaging or electronic photoediting techniques. Linear array of observation points. A datum adjusted for use in a specific location on the earth. Earth centre offset, rotation, scale factor relative to WGS 84. Primary tool used to create and maintain databases, display data and process data. Oasis montaj is a Graphical User Interface (GUI) system that provides all functionality required to process and display virtually any type of Earth Science data.
Glossary 301
Map (*.MAP)
map description file (*.MDF)
menu (*.OMN) Oasis database
Oasis montaj
Project (*.GPF)
Projection Method
random xyz data
row spheroid sub-array channels template view
Geosoft-developed file that integrates all graphics elements (lines, polygons and text) and layers (base maps, data, grids, plots and images) constructed in Oasis montaj. File used when making a standard map that has a sheet size and margins inside which there is a map area with a specified origin and scale. Usually, MDF files are created with the MAPSET GX. MDF files may also be created manually by editing an ASCII file with extension .MDF. Graphical list of commands or functions that a user may choose from. Object-oriented database that stores Earth Science data in a form that delivers fast access to data and efficient storage required for applications that deal with very large volumes of data. Oasis montaj is the core software platform that provides all functionality required to manage, manipulate, visualize and map spatially located Earth Science data. Binary file that defines a desktop environment. It is essentially an “electronic briefcase” that helps organise data and the activities related to a data processing project. The mathematical algorithm used to transform points on a spheroid to their relative locations on a flat surface (i.e. Transverse Mercator, Lambert Conformal). Located XYZ data that cannot be grouped naturally into separate lines. For example, regional gravity surveys or geochemical surveys are commonly considered random data because the locations appear somewhat random in nature. In the Oasis montaj spreadsheet, a horizontal line of cells that contain data. A spheroid is an oblate ellipsoid of revolution (basically an ellipsoid) that is used to model the surface of the earth for the purpose of making maps. Individual channels of data from an array channel. A file used to manage data in a particular format. Stored snapshot of the screen settings, current line, displayed channels and displayed profiles in Oasis montaj.
302 Index
Index grids, 119
* *. See dummy values **. See column width
3 3D Mapping, 262 Tool, 262 Viewer, 262 Voxel, 260 3-D shading, 153
9 -9999. See dummy values
A Access. See Microsoft Access accessing online help system, 3 technical support, 3 Acrobat PDF, 3 activating Image Colour Tool, 155 adding contours to maps, 119 database comments, 236 printer configuration, 242 advanced gridding, 173 mapping, 173 AGG. See Geosoft aggregate file aggregate, 128 applying formulas, 176 mask to a view, 135 ArcGIS MXD file, 38 ArcView Shapefile, 238 TIFF, 238 array channels, 307 ASCII comma delimited, 81 importing. See Microsoft Access ASCII files comma delimited, 81 editing, 162 attributes polygon, 143 Authorize Internet, 272 AutoCAD DXF, 238 Auto-Recolour
B base map control file, 161 surround, 97, 99 base maps creating, 95 custom, 161 figure style, 95 map style, 97 base view, 19, 127, 128 basic statistics, 58 batch printing, 245 processing, 167 bi-directional gridding, 108, 190 Bigrid Control File, 113 control file, 114 BIGRID GX, 108 control file, 114 dialog controls, 113 bitmap, 150, 238 Bookmark Snapshot, 121 bucket, 145
C CAD tools, 125 calculating basic statistics, 58 variogram, 193 cells channel header, 48 data, 48 CGM Plot, 238 changes discard, 75 saving database, 75 changing default settings, 31 line attributes, 138 Channel Master sample, 74 channel header cell, 48, 56, 59 channels, 307 array, 307 deleting, 65 editing, 66 listing, 56 protecting, 62 removing, 56 spreadsheet, 16 statistics, 58 type, 83 unprotecting, 62
Index 303 working, 63 clipboard bitmap, 150 copying maps to, 150 creating montage maps, 149 EMF, 150 exporting graphics, 151 overview, 148 paste georeferenced, 149 pasting, 150 properties, 148 closing project, 41, 123, 151 colour interactive shading, 157 palette, 155 percentile groups, 157 polygon fill, 143 polygons, 145 shaded images, 153 spectrum, 157 zones, 155 colour bars plotting, 178 colour imaging interactive, 155 Colour Shading Tool, 157 colour tables for gridding, 117 coloured symbols plotting proportional size, 180 plotting simple, 179 column, 307 delimiters, 83 removing, 56 width, 57 Comma separated value exporting, 81 importing, 81 comment header, 240 comments database, 236 compression database, 48 Computer Aided Drafting. See CAD computer ID eLicensing, 27 conditional expressions, 67 configuration printing, 241 configure printer and page, 241 configuring settings, 31 contouring methods, 120 Contouring Voxel Isosurface, 261 contours plotting, 119 control file
base map, 161 Bigrid, 114 for contouring, 120 MAPPLOT GX, 161 copying from Powerpoint, 150 from Word, 150 georeferenced information, 149 maps to clipboard, 150 tutorial files, 39 creating base maps, 95, 97 channels, 64 database, 47, 173 lines from polygons, 140 map groups, 131 montage maps, 149 new channel, 63 new maps, 89 project, 39, 125 scripts, 167 working channels, 63 working directory, 39 CSV. See Comma separated value custom base maps, 161
D DAP Dapple, 267 data, 267 download, 267 metadata, 267 Metadata Browser, 267 Dapple Data, 267 Internet, 267 data cells, 48 comma delimited, 82 correlation, 193 displaying, 56 dynamic data links, 158 geochemical, 111, 173 gridding, 108, 197 gridding random, 110 importing, 53, 80, 173 importing for kriging, 192 interpolating, 70 plotting, 198 plotting profiles, 100 processing, 58, 176 range to map, 90 selecting, 88 semivariance, 192 spikes, 67 statistical, 111 Data Dapple, 267 data channel, 181
304 Index Data Import Wizard, 82, 83 data values, 178 posting on map, 179 data view, 19, 127 database, 307 adding comments, 236 applying formulas, 176 channels, 48 compression, 48 creating, 47 creating second, 173 details, 235 drag-n-drop, 55, 85 editing, 66 exporting, 78 fields, 48 Geosoft, 14 groups, 48 importing data, 53 indivdual table, 78 lines, 48, 56 maintenance utilities, 235 Oasis, 14 proprietary, 14 relational, 14 saving changes, 56 single table, 78 size, 48 size limits, 236 database elements, 236 databases creating, 80 defragmenting, 236 discard changes, 75 growing, 236 importing, 80 importing tables, 80 packing. See defragmenting repairing, 236 saving changes, 75 verifying, 236 datum, 307 Dbase, 77 default colour table, 32 error level reporting, 34 grid element type, 33 grid input fromat, 33 grid output fromat, 33 image cache, 34 map font, 32 menus, 32, 42 printing memory, 34 settings, 31 symbol font, 32 Default settings SETTINGS GX, 31 default.i0, 55, 175 define x,y projections, 207 defining projection, 207 defragmenting
database, 236 deleting channels, 65 delimited comma, 82 desktop, 307 details database, 235 dialog controls Bigrid, 113 discard changes, 75 disk cache images, 34 disk space, 236 displaying grids, 117 interpretation map, 126 profile, 60 spreadsheet data, 56 drag-n-drop database, 85 grid, 119 xyz, 55 drawing base map, 95 map groups, 127 polylines, 136 symbols, 179 dummy values, 55 including in export, 240 interpolating, 70 DXF AutoCAD, 238 dynamic data links, 158 linking, 153 links, 7, 20, 22 process link, 24
E edge symbol colour, 178 editing ASCII files, 162 channels, 66 groups, 128, 131 legend boxes, 142 maps, 125 polygons, 142 scripts, 169 eLicense Park, 29 Transfer, 30 Update, 31 eLicenses Lock/Unlock, 31 Upgrade, 29 eLicensing, 27 Licensing management system, 27 ellipsoid, 307 Encapsulated Post Script, 238
Index 305 Enhanced Metafile, 238 Enhanced Windows Metafile, 148, 150 equal zoning, 155 ER Mapper ECW Compressor, 238 ER Mapper RGB, 238 error level reporting default, 34 Excel. See Microsoft Excel Explorer tools Tools, 9 export formats, 77 exporting graphics, 151 individual tables, 78 maps, 238 Microsoft Access, 78 single table, 78 to CSV file, 81 to database applications, 239 to GIS applications, 239 to spreadsheet applications, 239 expressions conditional, 67 eyedropper, 145
F fiducial, 66 fiducials, 307 figure style base maps, 95 file types .AGG, 38, 178 .CSV, 81 .EMF, 148, 150 .GDB, 38 .GI, 39 .GM, 39 .GPF, 38 .GRD, 38 .GS, 38, 167 .GX, 38 .ITR, 178 .MAP, 38 .MDB, 80 .MDG. See Microsoft Access .MXD, 38 .OMN, 38 .SMN, 38 .TBL, 178 .XML, 38 .ZON, 178 ASCII. See Microsoft Access files for tutorial, 39 fill patterns, 143 symbol colour, 178 filling polygons, 145 filling gaps
using interpolation, 70 flight lines plotting, 100 formulas applying to database, 176 FoxPro, 77 full map, 105, 239
G gaps filling, 70 Gaussian value, 193 gdb drag-n-drop, 85 GDB. See Geosoft database file geochemical data, 111, 173 gridding, 190 georeference connections, 158 georeferenced objects pasting, 149 Geosoft aggregate file, 38, 178 colour zone file, 178 database file, 38 grid file, 38 image transform file, 178 map file, 38, 39 menu file, 38 project file, 38, 40 projection file, 39 Script file, 38 sub-menu file, 38 table file, 178 XML file, 38 XYZ files, 53 Geosoft Colour Grid, 238 Geosoft eXecutables, 38, 307 description, 23 Geosoft plot file, 238 Geosoft projections, 206 Geosoft script files. See scripts GeoTIFF, 238 Get Colour tool, 145 GI. See Geosoft projection file GM. See Geosoft map file GPF. See Geosoft project file Graphical User Interface, 307 graphics exporting, 151 high-resolution, 31 grd drag-n-drop, 119 GRD. See Geosoft Grid file grid, 307 creating new, 115 drag-n-drop, 119 grid element type default, 33 grid file. See Geosoft Grid file
306 Index grid image exporting, 151 grid input format default, 33 grid output format default, 33 grid projection, 218 gridding, 87 advanced, 173 bi-directional, 108, 190 data, 108, 197 description, 108 dialog, 113 dialog controls, 114 displaying grids on maps, 117 kriging, 190 krigrid, 110 minimum curvature, 109, 188 random, 190 random data, 188 tinning, 191 trend-enforced, 112 using colour tables, 117 Gridding Voxel, 260 grids, 307 colour shaded, 153 contouring, 119 displaying, 117 Grids recolour, 119 groups, 307 copying, 149 creating new, 131 definition, 19 editing, 128, 131 hiding, 133 in maps, 19 in spreadsheet, 16 masking, 134, 135 moving, 133 on map, 127 pasting georeferenced, 149 selecting, 128, 131 growing databases, 236 GS, 167, See Geosoft script file file GX. See also Geosoft eXecutables dialog box, 23 GX Developer, 23 GXs BIGRID, 108, 113, 114 KRIGRID, 110 MAPPLOT, 161, 162, 165 RANGRID, 110, 188
H header cell, 56 help accessing online, 42, 44 hiding
groups, 133 high-resolution graphics, 31
I image cache default, 34 Image Colour tool, 155 images colour shaded, 153 images or image file, 307 imaging, 153 interactive colour, 155 interactive colour shading, 157 import formats, 77 import template, 55 importing ASCII data, 77 data, 53 data for kriging, 192 database tables, 80 databases, 80 Excel data, 77 from CSV file, 81 into second database, 173 XYZ data, 173 XYZ files, 53 indentifying linear features, 136 Install Administrator, 28 eLicense, 27, 28 Installing Oasis montaj, 28 interactive colour imaging, 155 colour shading, 157 shadowing, 155 Internet communications, 272 connectivity, 272 interpolating data, 70 interpretation map displaying, 126 Isosurface 3D contour, 261
J JPEG, 238
K kriging, 110, 190 overview, 191 krigrid plotting data, 198 KRIGRID GX, 110
Index 307
L last map view, 105 layers moving, 128 on map, 127 legend ternary colour, 204 legend boxes editing, 142 legend symbols, 187 legends plotting, 178 Line Command Toolbar, 61 line path plotting, 100 Line Selection Tool, 89 linear features indentifying, 136 linear zoning, 155 lines, 307 changing attributes, 138 creating polygons from, 140 database maximum, 48 non-parallel, 110 on map, 127 plotting survey, 100 polylines. See polylines selecting, 61, 88 selecting by range, 89 snapping to, 138 linking, 153 data, 22 data points, 158 dynamic, 22 objects, 22 links dynamic process, 24 list channels, 56 loading menus, 42 local datum transform, 307 log contour, 120 log10, 176
M main window, 307 maintenance database, 235 maker, 24 manuals accessing online, 42, 44 printing, 45 map. See also maps Map Base view, 19 creating, 89 Data view, 19 default font, 32
description file, 308 description of, 19 full, 105 groups, 19 last view, 105 navigating, 102 object, 128 origin, 150 panning, 104 redraw, 105 shrink, 105 Snapshot, 121 surround, 127 templates, 89, 92 views, 19 zooming, 103 MAP. See maps Map (*.MAP), 308 map projections, 205 map style base maps, 97 Map view projection, 222 MapInfo TAB, 238 MapInfo TIFF, 238 mapping, 87 advanced, 173 selecting data for, 88 tools, 125 Mapping 3D, 262 MAPPLOT GX, 161, 162 control file, 161, 165 maps adding contours, 119 adding grids, 117 adding profiles, 100 adding survey lines, 161 base map, 95, 161 base view, 127 batch printing, 245 clipboard, 148 creating groups, 131 data view, 127 editing, 125 exporting, 238 exporting graphics, 151 function, 127 groups, 127 interpretion, 126 linking data, 159 montage, 150 offset, 150 opening, 126 parts of, 127 pasting georeferenced, 149 pasting graphics, 151 print preview, 243 printing, 238, 241, 244 scale, 150 shaded relief, 153 mark statistics, 58
308 Index masking apply to view, 135 groups, 134, 135 rectangular, 134 math formula tool, 67 new channel, 64 maximum groups, 48 lines, 48 value, 59 MDB files. See Microsoft Access memory printing, 34 menu, 308 menus loading, 42 setting default, 42 Metadata Tool, 273 viewing data, 273 Microsoft Access, 77, 79, 80 database file, 80 exporting to, 78 Microsoft Excel exporting to, 81 importing from, 81 minimum curvature gridding, 109, 188 interpolation method, 71 montage maps using clipboard, 149 moving groups, 133 multiple projections on map, 228 MXD. See ArcGIS MXD file
N navigating map, 102 new channel, 64 database, 48, 80, 173 group, 131 project, 125 new channel, 63 normal zoning, 155 north arrow, 19, 95, 127 nugget, 195
O Oasis database, 308, See database Oasis montaj, 308 default settings, 31 integrated environment, 6 Mapping and Processing System, 4 starting, 37 Viewer, 4 oasis.omn, 42 object
maker, 24 objects pasting georefenced, 149 ODBC. See Open Database Connectivity offset, 150 OMN. See Geosoft menu file online help accessing, 3 Manuals, 42, 44 Technical notes, 42, 44 Tutorials, 42, 44 opening maps, 126 project, 153 output format, 239
P packing databases. See defragmenting panning map, 104 Paradox, 77 parameters variogram, 195 pasting georeferenced groups, 149 on map, 150 patterns copying, 145 polygon fill, 143 PCX, 238 PDF Acrobat file, 3, 45 percentile groups colour, 157 plotting. See printing colour bars, 178 contours, 119 krigrid data, 198 legend symbols, 187 legends, 178 profiles, 100 proportional coloured symbols, 180 range classified symbols, 184 simple coloured symbols, 179 survey lines, 100 symbols, 178 zone coloured symbols, 182 PNG, 238 points snapping to, 137 Polygon Fill tool, 145 polygons creating from lines, 140 editing, 142 fill patterns, 143 polylines drawing, 136 poster using clipboard, 149 posting data values, 178, 179 power value, 193
Index 309 Powerpoint. See Microsoft Powerpoint previewing printing, 243 printer drivers, 241 printing batch, 245 configuration, 241 maps, 238, 241, 244 online tutorials, 45 options Geosoft bands, 241 Geosoft bands and dither, 241 HP-RTL, 241 previewing, 243 setup, 241 printing memory default, 34 processing data, 58, 176 selecting data for, 88 using scripts, 167 processing speed, 48 profile view, 66 profile window, 18, 60 profiles, 18 displaying, 60 linking data, 159 options, 60, 72 plotting, 100 scale, 60, 72 variables, 18 project closing, 41, 123, 151 creating, 39, 125 opening, 153 saving, 41, 123, 151 Project, 8 project coordinate, 208 Project Explorer, 8 projected long,lat, 214 projected x,y, 209 projecting data, 205 Projection datum, 205 Projection ellipsoid, 205 Projection Local Datum Transform, 205 projection method, 308 Projection method, 205 Projection spheriod, 205 Projection Warp, 228 projections, 205 Projects *.gpf files, 9 proportional size symbols, 178, 180 protecting channels, 62
Q quick contour, 120
R random gridding, 190 random data gridding, 188 random xyz data, 308 range classified symbols, 178, 184 range/slope, 195 RANGRID GX, 110, 188 recolour grids, 119 recording scripts, 167 rectangular mask, 134 redraw map, 105 relief image, 153 removing channels, 56 rendering map groups, 127 order, 19 repairing databases, 236 resolution map, 150 rows, 16, 308 running scripts, 171
S sample interval, 16 saving databases, 75 project, 41, 123, 151 scale bar, 19, 94, 95, 127 scaling profile windows, 60, 72 Script file, 38 scripts, 167 creating, 167 editing, 169 recording, 167 running, 171 sample file, 169 second database, 173 selecting current view, 149, 150, 151 data, 88 groups, 128, 131 lines, 89 variogram model, 195, 196 semivariance, 192 semi-variogram. See variogram setini, 169 setting default menus, 42 settings configuring, 31
310 Index default, 31 setup printing, 241 shaded images, 153 shadowing interactive, 155 show profile, 60, 66 shrink map, 105 sill, 195 size database, 48 SMN. See Geosoft sub-menu file Snap to line, 138 Snap to point, 137 snapping mode, 150 Snapshot bookmark, 121 Map, 121 spectrum colour, 157 speed, 48 spherical model nugget, 195 spherical value, 193 spheroid, 308 spikes removing, 67 spreadsheet, 16 column width, 57 columns. See channels components, 16 description, 47, 56 displaying data, 56 linking data, 159 processing data, 176 view, 16, 56 window, 16, 61, 65, 177 statistics channel, 58 marking, 58 report, 58 saving, 59 sub-array channels, 308 survey lines parallel, 108 plotting, 100 tie, 108 surveys plotting lines, 100 symbol font default, 32 symbols colour legend bars, 178 horizontal colour legend bars, 178 legend, 178, 187 plotting, 178 proportional size, 178, 180 range classified, 178, 184 zone coloured, 178, 182
T template, 308 map layout, 92 xyz import, 55 ternary colour legend, 204 tie lines gridding, 108 TIFF, 238 TIFF Compressed, 238 tinning, 191 Tool Metadata Browser, 273 trend-enforced gridding, 112 tutorial files list, 39 tutorials accessing online, 42, 44 printing, 45
U unprotecting channels, 62 utilities database maintenance, 235
V value dummy, 55 variogram calculating, 193 parameters, 195 selecting model, 195 spherical model, 195 variogram model selecting, 196 variograms, 191 calculating, 192 displaying, 192 verifying databases, 236 view, 308 View/Group Manager, 131 View/Group Manager Tool, 128 viewed region, 239 Viewing Metadata, 273 views applying a mask, 135 base, 127 changing, 150 copying, 149 data, 127 pasting, 149 Visual Basic, 23 Voxel 3D Grid, 260 3D Kriging, 260 Isosurface, 261
Index 311
W Warp Image file, 231 Warp Projection, 228 Windows clipboard, 148 printer driver, 241 working channels creating, 63 working directory creating, 39
X XML. See Geosoft XML file xyz drag-n-drop, 55 XYZ data importing, 53, 173
Z zone colour symbols, 178, 182 zoning, 155 data, 155 zooming map, 103
